JP2020058571A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine capable of preventing a player from having misunderstanding.SOLUTION: A sub-control part can perform additional state result notification for reporting the total number of AT games granted in an additional state in completion of the additional state, and does not execute additional state result notification when satisfaction of a completion condition of an advantageous section is satisfied as a result of granting of the number of AT games in an additional state while executing additional state result notification when an additional state is completed without determination of satisfaction of a completion condition of an advantageous section as a result of granting of the number of AT games in an additional state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified.

As this kind of slot machine, by controlling to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1,500 games,
It has been proposed to end the advantageous state and also initialize information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of games remaining in the advantageous state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6167349

In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous state reaches a limit value, the advantageous state is terminated and information relating to control of the advantageous state such as the number of games remaining in the advantageous state. Will also be initialized, but if it is confirmed that the limit value will be reached by adding the number of games in the advantageous state in the middle of the advantageous state, it will be notified of the added result However, there is a possibility that the advantageous state will end even when the limit value is reached, but it may be misunderstood that the advantageous state will continue.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can prevent a player from misunderstanding.

The slot machine of the means 1 is
A variable display section (reel 2) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified
L, 2C, 2R),
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling the advantageous section,
Numerical value updating means for updating a specific numerical value in the advantageous section,
Advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when the ending condition that is satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number is satisfied,
Advantageous state control means for controlling in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to an advantageous amount in the advantageous zone,
A specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state to increase the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
Specific result notification means capable of executing a specific result notification for notifying the advantageous amount increased in the specific state when the specific state ends,
Derivation operation means that the player operates to derive the display result,
An operation mode notification unit capable of performing an operation mode notification for notifying an operation mode of the derivation operation unit;
Equipped with
The specific result notification means,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific result notification is executed when the specific state ends without confirming that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number, the specific result notification is not executed,
The operation mode notification includes a first notification mode and a second notification mode,
The operation mode notification means may perform the operation mode notification in the first notification mode or the second notification when it is not determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in the advantageous state. While the operation mode notification may be performed according to the mode, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in the advantageous state, the operation mode notification is performed in the first notification mode. Although it may be performed, the operation mode notification is not performed in the second notification mode.
According to this feature, as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state is finished without being sure that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the specific amount that notifies the increased advantageous amount in the specific state is specified. While executing the result notification, the specific result notification is not executed when it is determined that the specific value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, so the specific result notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous state continues even after the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. In addition, before it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the possibility of the specific state is obtained by properly using the notification mode of the operation mode notification as the first notification mode or the second notification mode. Etc. can be suggested.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

FIG. 36 is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine. It is a figure for explaining a game state. It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for explaining the composition of a game auxiliary indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of navigation notification and navigation production. It is a figure for explaining a game section. It is a figure for demonstrating an area display and an inside suggestion. It is a figure for explaining a display mode of a game auxiliary indicator in an error state and a setting confirmation state. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the restart order of section display and navigation notification when power supply is restarted after power supply to the slot machine is stopped during execution of section display and navigation notification. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of the game start waiting processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow diagram showing the control content of the payout control process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for explaining an example of change of a net increase number counter value. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control content of the re-game operation time process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for explaining transition of a display mode, such as a game auxiliary indicator at the time of starting section display. It is a figure for explaining transition of a display mode, such as a game auxiliary indicator at the end of section display. It is a figure for explaining transition of a display mode, such as a game auxiliary indicator at the end of section display. It is a figure for demonstrating the control state regarding AT. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a control flow of a main control unit and a sub control unit in an AT state (normal). It is a figure for demonstrating the control flow of a main control part and a sub-control part at the time of shifting to an AT state (ED) from an AT state (normal). It is a figure for explaining the flow of control of the main control part and the sub control part in the addition state. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control of a main control part and a sub-control part at the time of shifting to an AT state (ED) from an addition state. It is a figure for explaining AT production (normal) and navigation production which a sub control part performs. It is a figure for explaining an addition effect which a sub control part performs in an AT state (normal). It is a figure for explaining addition states A-C. It is a figure for explaining the addition state effect A which a sub control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the addition state result notification A which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for explaining the addition state effect B which a sub control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the addition state result alert B which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for explaining operation demand production which a sub control part performs. It is a diagram for explaining the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect performed by the sub-control unit. It is a figure for explaining AT state production (ED) which a sub control part performs. It is a diagram for explaining the ED effect and the end pre-notification performed by the sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating an end post notification, an AT state result notification, and an intrusion prevention notification which a sub control part performs. It is a figure for explaining the end timing of the end posterior notification, the AT state result notification, and the intrusion prevention notification performed by the sub-control unit. It is the figure in order to explain the flow of production when the start condition of ED control is satisfied when AT state production (normal) is done. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the production in the case where the start condition of the ED control is not satisfied and the addition state production is ended. It is the figure in order to explain the flow of production when the start condition of ED control is satisfied while doing the addition state production.

Modes for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

[Form]
The slot machine of form 1,
A variable display section (reel 2) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified
L, 2C, 2R),
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling the advantageous section,
Numerical value updating means for updating a specific numerical value (advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter) in the advantageous section,
An end condition that is satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a specified number (end condition 1 of advantageous section,
An advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when the ending condition 2) is satisfied;
Advantageous state control means for controlling in an advantageous state (AT state) over a period according to an advantageous amount (AT game number) in the advantageous section,
Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state (additional states A to C) in which the advantageous amount is increased in the advantageous state,
Specific result notification capable of executing specific result notification (additional state result notifications A to C) that notifies the advantageous amount (AT game number) increased in the specific state when the specific state (additional state AC) ends Means and
Equipped with
The specific result notification means,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C),
The specific result notification (additional state result) is reached when the specific state is finished without confirming that the specific number (the advantageous zone game number counter, the net increase number counter) reaches the specified number (the upper limit game number, the specified number). Notifications A to C),
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C),
When it is decided that the specific values (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter) reach the specified number (the upper limit game number and the specified number) (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter are ED). It is characterized in that the specific result notification (addition state result notification A to C) is not executed when the first predetermined value or the second predetermined value, which is the control start condition, is reached.
According to this feature, as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state is finished without being sure that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the specific amount that notifies the increased advantageous amount in the specific state is specified. While executing the result notification, the specific result notification is not executed when it is determined that the specific value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, so the specific result notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous state continues even after the specific numerical value reaches the specified number.

A slot machine of form 2 is the slot machine according to form 1,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C),
When it is decided that the specific values (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter) reach the specified number (the upper limit game number and the specified number) (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter are ED). Specific notification indicating that the advantageous state (AT state) continues until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number (when the first predetermined value or the second predetermined value, which is the control start condition) is reached ( Specific informing means for performing (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect),
Specific production execution means for executing a specific production (AT state production (ED confirmation) and ED production) during the period until the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number after the specific notification is given,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, when it is decided that the specific value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase of the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific notification gives the advantage until the specific value reaches the specified number. It is suggested that the state will continue, and after that, the specific effect is executed during the period until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, so the advantageous state is specified by the specific notification and the specific effect thereafter. It can be made clear that the numerical value will continue until it reaches the specified value and that it will end at that point.

The slot machine of form 3 is the slot machine according to form 2,
The specific state includes a plurality of types of specific states (additional states A to C) in which at least one of an advantageous amount that can be expected to increase or a production mode is different,
In the specific notification means, in any type of specific state, as a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the specific state, the specific numerical value (advantageous zone game number counter, net increase number counter) is defined. When it is decided that the number (upper limit number of games, specified number) is reached (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value which are the start conditions of the ED control) The specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect),
In any type of specific state, the specific effect execution unit may perform the specific effect (AT state effect (ED) for a period until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number after the specific notification is performed. It is characterized by executing (decision) and ED effect).
According to this feature, regardless of which type of specific state is controlled, it is possible to recognize that the advantageous state ends when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in the common flow.

The slot machine of form 4 is the slot machine according to form 2 or 3,
An advantageous state effect executing means for executing an advantageous state effect (AT state effect (normal)) in the advantageous state (AT state),
The specific state includes a plurality of types of specific states (additional state effects A to C) in which at least one of the effect mode or the advantageous amount (AT game number) that can be expected to increase is different.
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state (additional state effects A to C), the advantageous state effect executing means sets the specific number (advantageous zone game number counter, net increase number counter) to a prescribed number (upper limit game number, After the specific state is terminated without being sure that the specified number of sheets is reached and the specific result notification means (additional state result notification A to C) is executed, the type of the specific state that has ended Regardless of this, a common advantageous state effect (AT state effect (normal)) is executed.
According to this feature, regardless of which type of specific state is controlled, the common advantageous state effect is executed after the end, so it is easy to recognize that the specific state has ended and transitioned to the advantageous state. Can be made.

A slot machine according to mode 5 is the slot machine according to any one of modes 2 to 4,
In the advantageous state (AT state), the remaining amount display means (AT game number display) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (AT game number),
The remaining amount display means causes the specific notification means to perform the specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect).
When the special effect execution means is used, the special effect execution unit does not display the remaining amount of the advantageous amount.
The feature is that an advantageous amount of remaining amount is displayed at the timing when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) and the ED effect) are started.
According to this feature, since the advantageous amount of remaining amount is not displayed when the specific notification is given, the player's consciousness for the specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state continues until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. Can be directed.

A slot machine of form 6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 2 to 5,
An advantageous amount increasing means (additional lottery) for increasing the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the advantageous state (AT state) is provided,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state (additional states A to C), the specific notification means causes the specific numerical value (advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter) to be a prescribed number (upper limit number of games, prescribed number). When it is decided to reach (the advantageous section game number counter, the net increase number counter reaches the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value which are the start conditions of the ED control), the advantageous state is also reached. As a result of the advantageous amount being increased by the advantageous amount increasing means, it is decided that the specific numerical value (advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a specified number (upper limit game number, specified number). When (the advantageous section game number counter,
(When the net increase counter reaches the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are the start conditions for the ED control)
Also, the specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect) is performed,
The specific effect executing means, even if it is decided that the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state. As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount, even when it is decided that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, even after the specific notification is made, until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. It is characterized in that the specific effect (AT state effect (ED confirmed) and ED effect) is executed over a period.
According to this feature, the advantageous amount is increased by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase of the advantageous amount in the specific state. As a result, even when it is decided that the specific value reaches the specified number, it is possible to recognize that the advantageous state ends when the specific value reaches the specified number in the common flow. .

A slot machine according to mode 7 is the slot machine according to any one of modes 1 to 6,
In the advantageous state (AT state), the remaining amount display means (AT game number display) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (AT game number),
The remaining amount display means displays an advantageous amount of remaining amount in the advantageous state, and the specific state (
It is characterized in that the advantageous amount of remaining amount is not displayed in the added states A to C).
According to this feature, since the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not displayed in the specific state in which the advantageous amount is increased, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the advantageous amount increasing in the specific state.

The slot machine of form 8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
A remaining amount display means (displaying the number of AT games) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) in the advantageous state (AT state),
End suggesting means (indication of end suggestion of AT state, advance notice of end of advantageous section) for suggesting the end of the advantageous state before the end of the advantageous state,
Equipped with
When it is not determined that the specific numerical values (the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter) reach the specified number (the upper limit game number and the specified number), the end suggesting means is the remaining amount displaying means. The display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount by (display of the number of AT games) is used to indicate the end of the advantageous state (notification of the end of the AT state), and it is confirmed that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. In this case, the display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount by the remaining amount display means is not used, but another display is used to indicate the end of the advantageous state (preliminary notification of the end of the advantageous section).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, when the advantageous state ends when the specified value reaches the specified number, the advantageous amount remains as in the case where the advantageous state ends without the specified value reaching the specified number. Since the display of the quantity is not used and the other display is used to indicate the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to indicate the end of the advantageous state without carelessly inciting the player.

A slot machine according to form 9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
Before the end of the advantageous state (AT state), the end suggesting means (A) for suggesting the end of the advantageous state.
T end condition end notification, advance section end notification)
The numerical value updating means,
A first numerical value updating means for updating a first numerical value (the number of advantageous interval games) as the specific numerical value in the advantageous interval;
Second value number updating means for updating a second numerical value (net medal increase in the advantageous section) as the specific numerical value in the advantageous section;
Including,
The advantageous section ending means is a first ending condition (end condition 1) that is satisfied when the first numerical value (advantageous section game number counter) reaches a first specified number (upper limit game number) in the advantageous section, or When one of the second end conditions (end condition 2) that is satisfied when the second numerical value (net increase counter) reaches the second specified number (specified number), the advantageous section is ended. ,
When the first numerical value (advantageous zone game number counter) reaches a first predetermined number (first predetermined value) before the first predetermined number (upper limit game number) is reached, the end suggesting unit is configured to output the second value. At any time when the numerical value (net increase counter) reaches the second predetermined number (second predetermined value) before reaching the second specified number (specified number), the fact that the end condition is satisfied is notified. The end of the advantageous state is suggested by performing common advance notification (preliminary notification of the end of the advantageous section),
The common prior notification is a notification including both the information regarding the first end condition (the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games) and the information regarding the second end condition (the remaining number of sheets up to the specified number of net additional sheets). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first termination condition established when the first numerical value updated in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number or the second numerical value updated in the advantageous section reaches the second specified number. Even when one of the second end conditions that is satisfied in step 1 is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended when the other is satisfied, so it is possible to prevent excessive advantage from being controlled by the advantageous section. When the first numerical value reaches the first predetermined number before reaching the first specified number,
At any time when the second numerical value reaches the second predetermined number before reaching the second prescribed number, a common prior notification is issued to notify that the ending condition is close to being satisfied. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section and the advantageous state from suddenly ending due to the second ending condition being satisfied.
At this time, since the common prior notification includes both the information about the first end condition and the information about the second end condition, even if the common prior notification is either the first end condition or the second end condition. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section and the advantageous state are ended when the above condition is satisfied.

A slot machine according to mode 10 is the slot machine according to any one of modes 1 to 9,
In the advantageous state (AT state), after it is determined that the specific numerical values (advantageous zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reach the specified number (upper limit game number, specified number), the specific numerical value is the specified number. During the period until reaching the specific effect (AT state effect (
ED confirmation) and ED effect) are provided, and a specific effect executing means is provided.
The specific effect executing means determines that the specific numerical value has reached the specified number (ED
It is characterized in that a specific effect for informing the advance advance notification, ED suggestion display) and the remaining number (remaining AT game number) until the specific value reaches a prescribed number is executed.
According to this feature, when it is confirmed that a specific numerical value reaches the specified number,
It is possible to let the player recognize the remaining number until the specific number reaches the specified number.

The slot machine of form 11 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
Advantageous result notifying means capable of executing advantageous result notification (AT state result notification) for notifying a result in the advantageous state (AT state) at the end of the advantageous state (AT state).
The end condition is met when the specific value (the advantageous-zone game number counter, the net increase number counter) reaches a predetermined number (for example, three games before) before reaching the specified number (upper limit game number, specified number). An end suggesting means for suggesting the end of the advantageous state by performing a prior notification for notifying that it is close (advance notification for the end of the advantageous section),
Arrival notification means for performing arrival notification (post-termination notification of advantageous section) for notifying that the specific numerical value has reached a prescribed number in a game in which the specific numerical value has reached a prescribed number,
Equipped with
It is characterized in that the arrival notification means continues the arrival notification (post-event notification of end of advantageous section) even during the period in which the advantageous result notification (AT state result notification) is being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player effectively recognize that the advantageous state has ended when the specific value reaches the specified number.

A slot machine according to mode 12 is the slot machine according to mode 11,
During the execution of the advantageous result notification (AT state result notification), there is provided an intrusion prevention notification means for performing intrusion prevention notification (intrusion prevention notification) for promoting intrusion prevention.
The inset prevention notification ends after a predetermined time (3 seconds or more) elapses,
The arrival notification (post notification of the end of the advantageous section) is continued even after a predetermined time has elapsed.
According to this feature, the slip-in prevention notification ends while the predetermined time elapses,
Since the arrival notification continues even after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is possible to make the player effectively recognize that the advantageous state has ended when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number.

The slot machine of form 13 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
Derivation operation means (stop switch 8L, which the player operates to derive the display result,
8C, 8R),
An operation mode notification unit capable of performing an operation mode notification (navi notification) for notifying an operation mode of the derivation operation unit;
Equipped with
The operation mode notification includes a first notification mode (first mode) and a second notification mode (second mode),
The operation mode notifying unit has not determined that the specific numerical value (advantageous zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches the specified number (upper limit game number, specified number) in the advantageous state (AT state). In this case, the operation mode notification may be performed in the first notification mode or the operation mode notification may be performed in the second notification mode, while the specific numerical value reaches a specified number in the advantageous state. If it is decided to do (the advantageous section game number counter,
When the net increase counter reaches the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value which are the start conditions of the ED control), the operation mode notification may be performed in the first notification mode. The operation mode notification is not performed in the two notification modes.
According to this feature, before it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, it is possible to specify the notification mode of the operation mode notification by using the first notification mode or the second notification mode. The possibility of the condition can be suggested.

The slot machine of form 14 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
When the specific state control means determines that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase of the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the specific state (additional states A to C) (the advantageous zone game number) The counter and the net increase counter are the first predetermined value and the second which are the conditions for starting the ED control.
When the predetermined value is reached), the specific state is ended even if the ending condition of the specific state is not satisfied.
According to this feature, even if it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state in the specific state, the specific state is not unnecessarily continued. .

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having a front opening, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, there are horizontally arranged reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of kinds of distinguishable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in a see-through window 3 provided substantially in the center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each of them is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three tiers so that the player can see it. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of types of symbols (“red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”) that can be identified.
, "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", "cherry b", "bell", "replay"
, "Plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a configuration using three reels, a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is configured, but the variable display section may be other than the reel, and, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols can be variably displayed by moving the belt on which is arranged. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section is configured by the physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured by the image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals.
, A medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a gaming value owned by the player), and within that range, a prescribed number determined in accordance with the gaming state (in this embodiment, MAXBET operated when setting the maximum number of bets in 3)
The switch 6, a settlement switch 10 operated when the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet number are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and the bet number are returned), and a game. The start switch 7 and reels 2L, 2 operated when starting
Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotations of C and 2R are provided so as to be operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the content thereof when an error occurs A game auxiliary display 12 displaying an error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, an advantageous section display indicating that control is performed in the advantageous section, the number of bets 1 BETLED 14 that lights up to indicate that 1 is set, and 2 BETLED that lights up to indicate that the bet number is set to 2
15, a 3BET LED 16 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 3, an insert request LED 17 that lights up to indicate that a medal can be inserted, and that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is effective. Start valid LED18 to notify by lighting
, A wait LED (lights up to wait for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game) by lighting, a light indicating that a replay game is in progress A game display unit 1 provided with an LED 20 during replay
3 is provided. Further, on the front surface of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying images and the like, and an effect switch 56 are provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is provided, the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R (see FIG. 3) that notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective. It is provided. Further, inside the effect switch 56, an LED (not shown) for notifying by lighting that the operation by the effect switch 56 is effective is provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key; The set value display 24 for displaying the set value and the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal inserting section 4 are provided on either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side described later provided inside the slot machine 1. There is provided a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to, and a medal selector (not shown) having an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank side.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for driving the above-mentioned reels 2L, 2C, 2R in response to a control signal from the main control unit 41, and a medal in response to a control signal from the main control unit 41. A hopper unit 35 for paying out the coins from the medal payout opening 9 is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and a setting change state will be described later. A reset / setting switch 38 is provided which functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. Performance control is performed.

On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the adjustment switch 10, the reset switch 23, the inserted medal sensor 31, the reel sensor (not shown) of the reel unit 34, and the hopper. A payout sensor and a full sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, a reset / setting switch 3
8 is connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input.

Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1
~ 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, closing request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle, right stop valid LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value indicator 24, flow path switching solenoid 30 The reel unit 34 and the hopper unit 35 are connected to each other, and these electric components are driven under the control of the main controller 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and is equipped with a main control unit 41 for controlling a game.

On the effect control board 90, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display 51 and speakers 53 and 54 capable of outputting sound are provided.
, Production devices such as reel LEDs (not shown) capable of irradiating the predetermined positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back side are connected, and the output states of these production devices are sub-mounted on the production control board 90. It can be controlled by the control unit 91. The sub control unit 91 includes the main control unit 41.
In response to the command transmitted from, various controls and the like for performing the effect are performed. In addition, the above-mentioned production switch 56 is connected to the production control board 90, and the input state of the production switch 56 can be detected by the sub-control unit 91.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value.
Specifically, the payout rate of medals can be changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery such as internal lottery that influences the advantage to the player. Set value is 1 to 6
6 has the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the slot machine 1. Turn the power on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state.
Then, the set value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the set value display 24, and the state is changed to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, it is changed to the setting value 1). Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is set as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game is allowed to proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate the clerk of the installed game shop. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires a further key operation, only a clerk of the game store who can hold the key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate it. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, and therefore can be operated only by a store clerk who has a predetermined key. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state under normal conditions.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion section 4, or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the gaming state, a predetermined pay line LN (see FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged horizontally in the middle row). (Set across symbols) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. Incidentally, when the medals are thrown in exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit. Further, in the present embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, each reel 2L, 2C, 2
The R is rotated, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. Reel 2L, 2
When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The design of the reel is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the reels 2L, 2C, 2 corresponding to the operations are operated within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (milliseconds in this embodiment)) from the time when the operation is performed on each stop switch.
Control for stopping the rotation of R is performed. Since the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and the pattern for 80 (rotation) × 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames is changed, a predetermined maximum By the time the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, it is possible to pull in symbols for up to 4 frames. In other words, in the stop control, the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated and the symbols that are four frames ahead of that, a total of five symbols (withdrawal range) Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

Thus, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination that is won in the internal lottery described later is selected. The constituent symbols are 4 from the symbol when the stop switch is operated.
If it is within the draw-in range to the top of the frame, the symbol is drawn onto the pay line LN to stop the rotation of the reel operated by the stop switch, while the winning combination that is won in the internal lottery is selected. If the symbols that make up are not within the pull-in range, the symbols that make up the winning combination that has not been won in the internal lottery will not stop on the winning line LN. It is possible to control the reel so that it is pulled onto the pay line LN and the rotation of the reel operated by the stop switch is stopped.

Then, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and one game ends, and a predetermined combination of winning symbol patterns on the pay line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In this case, a prize is generated, and the number of medals determined according to the prize is given to the player and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, on the pay line LN, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the game state is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the game state is shifted to the combination of the symbols. .

In the present embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all reels are stopped. Further, the control of one unit for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the gaming state, and it is not necessary to set the bet number and the small combination accompanied by the payout of medals. There are a re-gaming role that allows the next game to be started, and a special role that involves a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. Below, the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are collectively referred to as a general winning combination.
In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the combination. In the internal lottery, before the display result of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is derived by the main control unit 41, whether or not the winning of each winning combination is allowed (specifically, a predetermined number When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the bet number is set), it is decided by using a random number.

Of the winning flags of each combination, the winning flags of the small combination and the re-game combination are valid only in the game for which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special combination are The flag is valid until the combination of the permitted combinations is prepared, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the permitted combinations is prepared. That is, once the winning flag of a special winning combination is won, even if the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. Has become.

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing), it is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. The winning combination is a winning combination of a winning combination and a re-playing combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target winning combination). For the navigation target combination, for example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode set in advance, a combination that is a more advantageous stop mode than a stop mode that is stopped when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode, In the case where the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode determined in advance, the advantageous stop mode has a higher ratio of stopping than in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Also,
The advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode involving awarding of medals but also a stop mode involving a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable game state is avoided.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation notification for notifying navigation information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT) which is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 gives the player the right to be controlled by the AT,
Start control of AT and control to AT. Then, when the AT is controlled, the navigation notification is executed by winning the winning combination for the navigation, and the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player (for example, the pressing order, (Operation timing, etc.) by using the game auxiliary display 12, and by transmitting a command capable of specifying an operation mode that is advantageous for the player to the sub-control unit 91, the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to be notified using 51 or the like is executed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to surely win the navigation target winning combination that is won in the internal lottery.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is provided with the game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the payout number of medals, the error code, and the navigation information, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used in the navigation notification control. Although the navigation information is notified by using the navigation device, a dedicated display device capable of displaying only the navigation information may be provided, and the navigation information may be notified by using the dedicated display device in the navigation notification control.

[About the game state]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the game state to any of non-internal, internal, and special state (BB general, RB). The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-game combination to be selected by the internal lottery and the probability that the re-game combination is won by the internal lottery are common. In the present embodiment, non-internal, internal, special state BB general, special state RB
In the above, the probability of winning the re-game combination is different for each game state, but the probability of winning the re-game combination is uniform in the same game state. In addition, the type of re-gaming target that is selected by internal lottery in the inside is the same as that in non-internal, but the type of re-gaming target that is selected by internal lottery in BB general and RB is in a special state. Unlike during non-internal, the type of re-game combination that is a lottery target in an internal lottery in a BB in a special state is different from RB.

In the non-internal, the winning of the special part (BB) has not been carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started in a state in which the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory or a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data regarding a game state is stored is initialized, first, the slot machine 1 is controlled to be non-internal. . In addition, when the special state is ended, it is controlled to non-internal. And during the non-interior,
The special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the non-internal game, the special combination is dropped, and the game is ended by shifting to the internal. Also, a special role (BB) in the internal lottery
It is also ended when the special combination (BB) is won in the game won by the player and the special state is entered.

Incidentally, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the data regarding the game state is stored is not initialized when the above-mentioned setting change state is entered, and after the setting change state is finished,
The game state before the start of the setting change state is inherited. That is, if it was controlled to non-internal before the setting change state was started, it was continuously controlled to non-internal even after the setting change state ended, and was controlled to internal during the setting change state was started. The internal control is continued even after the setting change state ends.

Further, in the non-internal, in the game within the predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period is increased. While the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player while exceeding 100%, the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. There is. As will be described later, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% because the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified in the non-inside.

Inside, the winning of the special part (BB) has been carried over. It starts when the special part (BB) is won in the internal lottery during non-internal.

In the inside, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in a game within a predetermined period, the payout rate of medals per game during the period is 100%. On the other hand, since the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the payout rate of medals per game during the period is prevented from exceeding 100%. While the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% in the period in which the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified, in the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified, The payout rate does not exceed 100%. Further, in the inside, the probability that the small win is won in the internal lottery is the same as the probability in the non-internal win, while the predetermined re-gaming combination (in this embodiment, re-playing combination 1) is won in the internal drawing The probability of doing is set higher than during non-internal,
The inside is more advantageous than the inside.

The special state is a gaming state that is controlled in accordance with the winning of the special combination (BB), and is started when the special combination (BB) is won in a non-internal state, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, during the special state). When the total payout number of medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50), the process ends. After the special state ends, it is transferred to non-internal.

The special state includes BB general and RB as game states, and in the special state, any one of the game states is controlled until the game in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending condition is satisfied.

In the BB general, the probability that the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery is the same as in the non-internal and internal, but the winning probability of the special winning combination (RB) is high. When a special character (BB) wins inside and is transitioned to a special state, or the condition for ending the special state is not satisfied, R
It is started when B is finished. Then, in the general BB, the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery, the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped by the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the process is transferred to the RB.

RB is a state in which the probability that a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery is higher than that of the general BB during non-internal, internal. A special role (RB) is elected in an internal lottery during the BB general, and the special role (
The symbol combination (RB) is started by stopping on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. And R
In B, at least one of winning a predetermined number of times (8 times in the present embodiment) in the RB and playing a predetermined number of games (12 games in the present embodiment) in the RB is established. Then, the process is ended and the process is transferred to the general BB.

In general BB, the probability that a special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery is set to be higher than the probability that the special combination (RB) is won in the non-inside and inside. In addition, the probability that the re-gaming combination will be won in the internal lottery is set to 0, and the probability of winning the re-gaming combination in the non-internal is assigned to the probability of winning the special combination (RB) in the general BB. ing. On the other hand, the probability of winning the small win in the internal lottery in the BB general is set to the same probability as in the non-internal and internal.

Also, in the BB general, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery with the same probability as in the non-inside and inside, but as described later, it is not controlled to the advantageous section and the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified. It is supposed not to be done. In addition, a special winning combination (RB) that can be won in BB in general is a winning combination in which medals are not paid out. As a result, the payout rate of medals in the general BB does not exceed 100%.

The RB is in a state in which the probability that the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery is higher than the probability that the small winning combination is won in the non-internal and internal. In the RB, in the internal lottery, the first winning combination (the present embodiment) in which the number of medals (for example, one) smaller than the number of medals (for example, three) used for setting the bet number of one game is paid out in accordance with winning. In the example, the second small winning combination (in the present embodiment, the RB medium and small winning combination 2) is paid out with the number of medals larger than the number of medals used for setting the bet number in one game (for example, 8). The probability is higher (eg, about 3/4) than the probability (eg, about 1/4) of winning the RB middle and small role 1), and the expected number of medals paid out per game during the RB. The value (for example, 2.75) is smaller than the number of medals (for example, 3) used for setting the bet number in one game. Further, as will be described later, the control is not performed in the advantageous section, and the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. As a result, the payout rate of medals does not exceed 100% during RB. That is, B
In B general and RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%, and the medal payout rate in the special state does not exceed 100%. Further, in BB general and RB, the control is not performed in the advantageous section.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special combination (BB) is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1 / 3.4) previously set in the non-inside, and the inside is transferred,
In the inside, that is, in the state where the winning flag of the special combination (BB) is carried over, if the payout rate of the medals per game does not exceed 100%, the AT is not When controlled, the payout rate of medals per game is 100%
It is supposed to exceed.

In addition, in reel stop control, when a special combination and a small combination are simultaneously won, the small combination is prioritized and aligned. In the small winning combination, the drawing range of the special design (BB) composition pattern and the drawing range of the small design composition overlap, and whichever winning combination wins, the winning design of the winning combination is the winning design. It will stop at LN. In addition, when the special combination and the re-game combination are elected at the same time, the re-combination combination is always controlled. That is, when a small combination or a re-gaming combination is elected inside, the special combination (BB) is not won.

In addition, since any small role or any re-playing role is always won in the inside, the special part (BB) is prevented from winning once it is transferred to the inside. After the transition, the inside will be maintained.

In the slot machine 1, most of the games are controlled inside, so it is premised that they are controlled inside, and the payout of medals according to the set value (1 to 6 in this embodiment) Whether or not to control the AT in the inside so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each set value, specifically, the winning probability of the AT lottery described later, the winning probability of the navigation lottery, etc. are set. Thus, the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set.

Also, since the payout rate of medals is set according to the set value on the assumption that it is controlled inside, the payout rate of medals will be as designed when controlled to a game state other than inside. There is a possibility that it will deviate from the payout rate of, and it is preferable to control the inside as much as possible. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended to the player and the operation mode for winning the special combination (BB) are different so that it is easy to shift to the inside when not inside. That is, as long as the player is performing the stop operation in the recommended operation mode in the non-internal, the special role (BB)
Will not win.

Thus, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) has not been derived, the main control unit 41 determines whether the special combination (BB) is won. It is possible to carry over after the game.

In addition, the main control unit 41 operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are more advantageous due to the navigation notification while the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over (correct answer pressing order).
It is possible to control the AT for notifying the user, and it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside the interior.

As will be described later, in the non-internal and internal states of the game state, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed by winning the advantageous section transition lottery target to be described later in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section described below may be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. On the other hand, in the special state of the game state, the advantageous section transition lottery is not won as described later, and the game section is not shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.

Further, the special state is, for example, a state in which the winning probability of a small winning combination is increased by an internal lottery for each specified number of games, and it is transitioned to a predetermined case and continued until the predetermined number of games is played. It may be in a state of being played, or it may be continuously moved to a state in which the winning probability of the small role is increased in the internal lottery for each specified number of games, or regardless of the random number value obtained in the internal lottery. It is possible that the small winning role is elected, and it is possible to move to a predetermined case and end by playing one game, or the winning probability of the small winning role is increased by internal lottery every prescribed number of games. It may be a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is drawn out to the reels and the game is finished by executing one game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the special role (BB) to be in a special state by winning in the non-internal state, and in the BB general included in the special state, the special role in the internal lottery RB) wins and the special role (RB) wins, and the RB is controlled. However, it is possible to win the special role (RB) even in internal lottery during non-internal, non-internal and internal. The special role (RB) that has been won may be awarded or the RB may be controlled.

[About lottery target of internal lottery]
The internal lottery target combination that is a lottery target in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target combination includes one or more winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, it means that the winning combination included in the internal lottery target combination is won at the same time. .

As shown in FIG. 5, the internal lottery target winning combination includes a special winning combination (BB), a special winning combination (RB), a small pushing order winning combination 1, a small pushing order winning combination 2, a small pushing order winning combination 3, and a small pushing order winning combination 4, Push order small win 5, push order small win 6 (hereinafter, push order small wins 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push order small win), specific small win 1, specific small win 2
, RB small and medium combination 1, RB small and medium combination 2, and re-game combination 1.

The special combination (BB) is a combination accompanied by the shift to the special state by winning. Special role (BB
) Is an object of internal lottery when the game state is controlled to non-internal, while an object of internal lottery when the game state is controlled to internal and special (BB general, RB) It does not become.

The special combination (RB) is a combination accompanied by the shift to the aforementioned RB by winning. The special combination (RB) is the target of the internal lottery when the game state is controlled to BB general, while it is the internal lottery when the game state is controlled to non-internal and internal, BB general and RB. In the BB general, the probability that the special role (RB) will win in the internal lottery is when the game state is a state other than BB general (non-internal, internal, RB) It has a higher probability than.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal or internal, the special combination (RB) is not subject to internal lottery, and the gaming state shifts from non-internal or internal to RB. Although it is a configuration that is not played, even when the game state is controlled to non-internal or internal,
The special combination (RB) becomes the target of the lottery in the internal lottery, the special combination (RB) is won in the non-internal and the internal, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reel, so that the gaming state. May be configured to be able to shift from the non-inside or inside to the RB.

The push order small wins 1 to 6 are predetermined operation modes (in the present embodiment, assigned to each push order small win).
By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the order of operation), among the winning combinations included in the small winning combinations in the pushing order, the increasing winning combination in which the number of medals larger than the bet number is paid out is won.
By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, among the winning combinations included in the push-order small combination, the decreasing combination in which the number of medals less than or equal to the bet number is paid out is won. Occasionally, it is a role that may not win any winning combination. For this reason,
When the small winning combinations 1 to 6 are won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the operation mode according to the type of the winning combination.

When the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6 are won, the operation mode in which it is possible to win the increasing winning combination among the winning combinations included in the push order small winning combinations, that is, the operation mode which is advantageous to the player, is the push order small winning combination. In combination 1, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third (operations in the following order may be referred to as left middle right stop operation). is there)
In the push order small winning combination 2, the left reel 2L is first stopped, the right reel 2R is second stopped, and the middle reel 2C is third stopped. In the pushing order small winning combination 3, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. Operation (hereinafter,
It may be referred to as a middle left / right stop operation), and in the pushing order small winning combination 4, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped third. In the pushing order small winning combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C. Is an operation in an operation order of stopping the third reel (hereinafter, may be referred to as a right-left center stop operation). In the pushing order small winning combination 6, the right reel 2R is stopped first and the middle reel 2C is stopped second. Operation in the order of stopping the first reel 2L and stopping the third reel 2L (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as right-middle-left stop operation)
Is.

Push order small wins 1 to 6 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is non-internal and internal, and are generally controlled by the BB, and when the gaming state is controlled to any of these gaming states, the internal lottery is selected. Have the same probability of winning. On the other hand, the press order small wins 1 to 6 have a game state of R.
When controlled to B, it is not a target of internal lottery.

The specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are the winning combinations that are less likely to be won in the internal lottery than the other internal lottery target winning combinations. Further, the specific small winning combination 1 is a winning combination having a higher probability of being won in the internal lottery than the specific small winning combination 2. Specific small win 1 and specific small win 2 are in the non-internal and internal game states, BB
In general, it is a target of internal lottery when controlled, and when controlled in any of these game states, the internal lottery is won with the same probability. Further, the specific winning combination 1 and the specific winning combination 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

RB medium and small combination 1 and RB medium and small combination 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is non-internal or internal, and are generally controlled by the BB, and are internal only when the gaming state is controlled by RB. It becomes the target of the lottery.

The RB medium / small winning combination 1 is a small winning combination in which the number of medals (8 in this embodiment) larger than the number of medals used to set the bet number in one game is paid out in accordance with the winning, and the internal lottery in RB is performed. At, there is a probability of winning about 1/4. On the other hand, the RB medium / small winning combination 2 is a small winning combination in which the number of medals (one in this embodiment) smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number of one game is paid out in accordance with the winning. The chances of winning by lottery are about 3/4. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game during RB is 2.75.
The number of medals is less than the number of medals (three in the present embodiment) used for setting the bet number in one game, and the payout rate of medals in RB does not exceed 100%.

The re-gaming combination 1 is subject to an internal lottery regardless of whether the game state is controlled to non-internal or internal, and the game state is set to either non-internal or internal. Even when controlled, the internal lottery will win with the same probability. Also, when the gaming state is BB general and RB, it is not targeted for internal lottery.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the inside, the above-mentioned small wins (push order small wins 1 to 6, specific small wins 1, specific small wins 2) and internal lottery and The probability of winning the re-gaming combination (re-gaming combination 1) is increased when all push-order small winning combinations 1 to 6 are won, and winning when all specific small winning 1 and specific small winning 2 are won. If a small winning role is won without fail, the net increase in medals (the total number of medals paid out in a given period minus the total number of medals used to set the bet number in the given period) The average value of the total number of medals obtained per game is set to a predetermined value (three in this embodiment).

In the internal lottery, the special combination (BB), the special combination (RB), the pushing order small combination 1 to 6, the RB medium and small combination 1, the RB small and medium combination 2, the re-game combination 1 are the slot machines 1 in the internal lottery target combination. In the probability that there is no difference according to the set value set in, that is, regardless of the set value being set, a uniform probability is won, while the specific small winning combination 1 of the internal lottery target winning combinations And the specific small winning combination 2 is elected with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value that has been set.

The main control unit 41 can carry out an advantageous section lottery for deciding whether or not to shift a later-described game section to an advantageous section when the predetermined internal lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery. . Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the advantageous zone lottery may be referred to as an advantageous zone transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery, even if any setting value is set,
When the winning combination of the advantageous section transition lottery that has been won in the internal lottery is the same combination, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed so that it is determined with a uniform probability that the advantageous section transition lottery will be changed to the advantageous section.

Of the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6, the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the re-gaming winning combination 1 are the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combinations. These advantageous zone transition lottery targets have a non-internal game state,
It is designed to win with the same probability in the internal lottery when the game state is controlled to any of the inside, and when the game state is controlled to either non-inside or inside. The advantageous section transition lottery is performed when the winning combination of the internal lottery does not change.

In addition, a combination that is not an internal lottery target in the inside (in the embodiment, a special combination (BB), a special combination (RB), an RB medium / small combination 1, an RB medium / small combination 2), and a game state of non-internal / inside The advantageous section transition lottery is prevented from being triggered by the role of changing the probability of winning in the internal lottery depending on which is controlled.

The main control unit 41 carries out an AT lottery for deciding whether or not to control the above-mentioned AT, when a predetermined internal lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery. Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the AT lottery may be referred to as an AT lottery target combination.

Among the internal lottery target combinations, the press order small winning combinations 1 to 6, the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the re-gaming winning combination 1 are A.
It is a target for the T lottery. When the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed by winning one of these AT lottery target winning combinations in the internal lottery. In the AT lottery, even if any setting value is set in the slot machine 1, when the AT lottery target winning combination that is won in the internal lottery is the same winning combination, it is decided with a uniform probability that the AT is controlled to the AT. The lottery will be held so that there will be.

Further, in the AT lottery that is carried out when the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2 is won in the internal lottery, it is triggered by the fact that one of the pushing order small winning combinations 1 to 6 and the re-gaming winning combination 1 is won. The probability that the AT is controlled is determined with a higher probability than when the control is performed. Further, in the AT lottery that is triggered by the winning of the specific winning combination 1, it is decided with a higher probability that the AT will be controlled with a higher probability than when the winning of the specific winning combination 2 is triggered. It is like this.

The probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and is triggered by the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery target role. In the advantageous zone transition lottery that is performed, by performing a lottery with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value,
The shift to the advantageous section may be determined with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value. Also, the probability of winning the AT lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery that is triggered by the winning of the AT lottery target Then, a configuration may be used in which the AT control is determined with a probability that there is a difference depending on the set value by performing a lottery with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery target in the internal lottery is the probability that there is a difference according to the set value set in the slot machine 1,
In the AT lottery that is triggered by the winning of the AT lottery target combination, by performing the lottery with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value, it is determined that the AT is controlled with the probability that there is a difference according to the set value. It may be configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a difference in the probability that the winning combination in the internal lottery will be won in the internal drawing according to the set value set in the slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as a combination with a setting difference). In some cases), or a combination with no difference (hereinafter, it may be referred to as a non-setting combination), the advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is triggered by the winning of the combination. However, when the winning combination in the internal lottery is a winning combination with a setting difference, it is possible to use the advantageous section transition lottery or A
While performing the T lottery, it may be configured such that the advantageous zone transition lottery or AT lottery is not triggered by the fact that there is no setting difference hand, and one of the advantageous zone transition lottery and the AT lottery has a setting difference in the internal lottery. It may be configured such that the winning of the winning combination is performed as a trigger, and the other of the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery is triggered by the winning of the winning combination without setting difference in the internal lottery.

[About the structure of the game auxiliary display]
The configuration of the game auxiliary display unit 12 included in the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game auxiliary display 12 is composed of two displays 12L and 12R capable of turning on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and can turn on each segment. It is an indicator. By controlling a predetermined segment of each of the display devices 12L and 12R in a lighting manner, a predetermined number (“0” to “9”), a symbol (for example, “−”, “.”, Etc.), an alphabetic character (for example, “E”). , Etc.) is displayed in one or two digits, the number of medals paid out (not shown), the fact that it is controlled to an advantageous section (see FIG. 6B), and the type of error that has occurred It is possible to display an identifiable error code (for example, see FIG. 10A) and a navigation number (see FIG. 7) as navigation information to be notified by the navigation notification.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section,
When a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied (for example, at the start of a game in which the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section and the payout rate (payout number / bet number) can exceed 100%) During the notification period until the notification end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section is ended), the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 (hereinafter, section display LED 12)
It is possible to display a section indicating that the game section is being controlled to an advantageous section by controlling the lighting state (which may be called a)).

[About navigation notification and navigation production]
The navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display device 12, and the navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display device 51 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main control unit 41 controls the AT, and when the navigation target winning combination (in the present embodiment, the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification to notify the player. By displaying a navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, which can identify an advantageous operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (in this embodiment, it may be referred to as an operation order, hereinafter, may be referred to as a correct answer order). It is possible to notify the operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 7, the navigation notification includes left-center-right navigation, left-right-center navigation, center-left-right navigation, center-right-left navigation, right-left-center navigation, and right-center-left navigation. In the left-middle-right navigation, the navigation number "1-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the left-middle-right stop operation. In the left / right center navigation, the navigation number “2-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the left / right center stop operation. In the middle left and right navigation, the navigation number "3-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle left and right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “4-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation. In the right / left middle navigation, the navigation number “5-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to inform that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the right / left middle stop operation. In the right-middle-left navigation, the navigation number "6-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the right-middle left stop operation.

Further, as described above, the main control unit 41 starts the section display for notifying that the section display LED 12a is controlling the advantageous section, and then continuously controls the section display LED 12a to the lighting state. When performing the navigation notification during the execution of the section display, the section number LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in a lighting state, and the navigation number to be notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12. To control.

In the present embodiment, the stop notification 8L, which is advantageous for the player in the navigation notification,
As the operation mode of 8C and 8R, the operation order (correct answer pressing order) is notified, but the navigation notification may be used to suggest the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R which is advantageous to the player. , Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8 which are advantageous for the player
A configuration that suggests a combination of R operation order and operation timing may be used. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is the predetermined operation timing for the predetermined reel, the liquid crystal display 51 corresponds the image of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing to the predetermined reel. It is possible to suggest the operation mode by displaying the operation mode.

When performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 transmits, to the sub control unit 91, a command capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect that causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a navigation image that suggests the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R specified based on the command. . In the navigation image, numerical images “1” to “3” indicating the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a pattern image suggesting that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel are displayed. , Reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the navigation effect, for example, when the left-middle-right stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, a navigation image suggesting the left-middle-right stop operation (in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the left reel 2L). The numeral image of “1” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the numeral image of “1” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the numeral “2” is displayed on the position corresponding to the middle reel 2C, and the numeral “3” is displayed on the position corresponding to the right reel 2R. Display it. In addition, when the left / right center stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the center left / right stop operation is notified, the center right / left stop operation is notified, the right / left center stop operation is notified, or the right / left stop operation is notified. When the notification is displayed, the navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the control is performed so as to suggest the corresponding operation mode.

[About the game section]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control either the normal section or the advantageous section as the game section.

The normal section is a game section where no navigation information is given, and it starts when the next game starts after the advantageous section ends, and it is decided that the advantageous section transition lottery will shift to the advantageous section. It is ended by being done. In the normal section, the aforementioned section display is not performed, and the section display L
The ED 12a is controlled to be turned off.

Further, in the normal section, when the above-mentioned game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target combination (pushing order small combination 1 to 6, in internal lottery) By winning the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the re-gaming winning combination 1), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery is performed and the advantageous section is shifted to.

The probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery target in the internal lottery is uniform regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and is performed based on the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery target. In the advantageous zone transition lottery, a lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone with a probability with a difference according to the setting value set in the slot machine 1 is performed based on a predetermined advantageous zone transition lottery table. It is possible to do. In addition, in the advantageous zone transition lottery, regardless of the controlled game state (non-internal, internal), it is possible to determine that there is a uniform probability of shifting to the advantageous zone based on the result of the internal lottery. It has become.

Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined when the gaming state is BB in the special state, that is, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery is won is set to 0. In general, even if the winning target of the advantageous section transition lottery is won, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery, and the advantageous section is not shifted to the advantageous section. It should be noted that when the gaming state is the special state, the advantageous section transition lottery may not be moved to the advantageous section by not performing the advantageous section transition lottery even if the winning combination is won.

In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state RB, the advantageous section transition lottery is not won as the advantageous section transition lottery target combination is not selected in the internal lottery as described above, so the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. There is no such thing, and it is designed not to shift to the advantageous section. That is, when the special state (BB general and RB) is controlled, the transition to the advantageous section is not made.

Also, in the normal section, regardless of whether the game state is controlled to non-internal or internal, even if the above-mentioned AT lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, AT lottery is not performed. , The AT does not decide to control, and the AT is not controlled.
In the AT lottery during the normal section, the probability of winning the AT control is set to 0, so that the AT control may not be determined.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and based on the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery performed, a lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability may be performed regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery according to the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and it is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination. In the section transfer lottery, the lottery may be configured to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery according to the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and it is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination. In the section transition lottery, a lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a probability that there is a difference depending on the setting value set in the slot machine 1 may be performed.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a gaming section which is advantageous as compared with the normal section because the navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section is started when the next game is started after it is decided to shift to the advantageous section by the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, and is ended when a predetermined advantageous section end condition is satisfied. . In the advantageous zone, the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) of medals is 1 because the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous zone.
The above-mentioned section display is started at the start of a game that can exceed 100%, and the section display LED 12a
Is controlled to be in a lighting state, so that it is informed that the advantageous section is controlled. In addition, in the advantageous section, the navigation information is given when a predetermined navigation condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, it is controlled to the AT state described later and the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery). The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player is notified.

Further, in the advantageous section, when the above-mentioned game state is controlled inside, the AT lottery is performed by winning the AT lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery. By winning the AT lottery,
After that, the AT state is entered in which the AT is controlled. Then, when the target object for navigation is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is given, and the stop switch 8L is advantageous for the player.
, 8C, 8R operation modes are notified, and the advantageous section is a gaming section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section.

In the advantageous section, when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal, AT is selected by internal lottery.
Even if the lottery target is won, the AT lottery is not performed and the AT is not controlled. Further, in the advantageous section, even if the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination is won by the internal lottery, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed.

As the end condition of the advantageous section, the end condition 1 satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the net number of medals added in the advantageous section Is a prescribed number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number of coins to be paid out in the slot machine 1 (15) is subtracted from the upper limit of 2400) and the maximum number (3) to be used for setting the bet number is added. End condition 2 that is satisfied when the value exceeds the specified value)), the end condition that can be satisfied without being based on the number of advantageous zone games and the net number of medals, and is a predetermined arbitrary condition (in the present embodiment, in the game. Includes end condition 3 that is satisfied when the controlled gaming state is non-internal), and an advantageous interval when at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied It is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery is selected by winning the advantageous section transition lottery target in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section is shifted to the advantageous section, but when the game section is controlled to the normal section, a predetermined advantageous section transition combination is won, and the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. It may be configured to move to.

In this way, the main control unit 41 can control to the advantageous section both in the inside where the winning of the special combination (BB) is not carried over and in the inside where the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over. Is. The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside is that the end condition 3 is satisfied, The condition for ending the advantageous section in the inside is different from the condition for ending the advantageous section in the non-inside. As a result, in the configuration in which the payout rate of medals is proper inside, while the payout rate of medals is incorrect inside non-internal, the end conditions of the advantageous section in the inside and the advantageous section in the non-internal Since the end condition is different, it is possible to perform suitable control depending on whether it is inside or outside.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to control in an advantageous section in general BB. As a result, in the BB in which the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the BB is not controlled to the advantageous section, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the BB is not necessary.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to control in an advantageous section in RB. As a result, in the RB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so
It is not necessary to perform unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in B.

[Regarding section display and internal suggestions]
The effect during preparation that the sub control unit 91 uses the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the special control (BB) is won in the main control unit 41 by the internal lottery, but the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished in the game (the stop switch is released). And, when the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not stopped on the reels, and the selected special combination (BB) is carried over without being won. In this case, the game state is changed from non-inside to inside when the game ends, and is controlled to inside when the next game starts.

Further, the main control unit 41 can transmit a command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled according to the progress of the game, to the sub control unit 91, and at the start of each game,
A command capable of specifying the controlled game state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Also,
A sub-control command that can specify a game state, a game section, and a control state relating to the AT that are currently controlled at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game in this embodiment) in each game. It is transmitted to the section 91. In addition, at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished and all reels are stopped, the game is finished) A command capable of specifying the controlled game state, the game section, and the control state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when a RAM clear is performed to initialize a storage area including a predetermined area in the RAM 41c in which the above-mentioned data relating to the game state is stored, a command capable of specifying that the RAM clear is to be executed is issued to the sub control unit 91. It is designed to be sent.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a preparation effect that suggests that the game state controlled by the main control unit 41 side is non-internal. Is.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the sub control unit 91 determines that the game state is changed after the RAM clear is specified on the main control unit 41 side based on the command received from the main control unit 41. When it is specified that the internal control has not yet been performed and the internal control is performed, or when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory, the storage unit (for example, R
When it is specified that the game state is not yet controlled to the inside by the main control unit 41 side after being activated in the initialized state (AM, etc.) , Control to perform the performance during preparation.

In the preparation during preparation, a preparation screen (in this embodiment, an image of a character and a character image of “in preparation”) and a non-inside suggestion image (in this embodiment, an image of a star) are displayed on the liquid crystal display. When it is specified that the game state is non-internal, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an in-preparation screen and a non-internal in-progress image, thereby indicating that the game is being prepared. When the game state is not in the non-internal state and the special state is specified, the non-inside medium suggestion image is not displayed. By displaying only the image in preparation, it is suggested that the game is in preparation and the game state is controlled to the special state.

When it is specified that the game state has been moved to the inside based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the production under preparation is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the special role in the internal lottery. (BB) is elected, but at the end of the game in which the winning of the special part (BB) is missed, the display of the in-preparation screen and the non-interior in-progress image on the liquid crystal display 51 is terminated, and the in-preparation effect is produced. Is finished and the normal effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal effect, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a normal effect screen (in the present embodiment, an image showing a character walking around the city) displayed in a non-AT state in which AT control, which will be described later, is not performed. , Produce according to the progress of the game. By shifting from the production in preparation to the normal production,
On the main control unit 41 side, it is suggested that the game state is inside, that is, that the payout rate of medals has shifted to the normal state where the payout rate is as designed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as inside suggestion). ing.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the game state is not in the internal state and is shifted to the special state based on the command received from the main control unit 41 in the state where the liquid crystal display 51 is performing the preparation effect, That is, at the end of the game in which the special part (BB) has been won in the internal lottery and the special part (BB) has won, the display of the non-internal suggestion image is ended while the display of the preparing screen is continued, Control to continue production during preparation. Then, it is controlled to restart the display of the non-internal suggestion image by specifying that the special state is ended and the non-internal transition is made based on the command received from the main control unit 41. After that, until the game state is specified to be moved to the inside, control is performed so that the preparation effect is continued.

The main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section as described above, wins the AT lottery in the game in the advantageous section and shifts to the AT state, and further, the predetermined start condition in the subsequent games. When is satisfied, the section display is started. As described above, the non-internal advantageous zone is transitioned to, but the advantageous zone is terminated because the end condition 3 is satisfied in the first game of the advantageous zone, so the advantageous zone is displayed in the non-internal advantageous zone. The start condition is not met and the section is not displayed. In addition, since at least two games (a game in which the AT lottery is performed and a game in which the navigation target winning is won) are required after the transition to the advantageous section in order for the condition for starting the display of the section to be satisfied, at the time of starting inside. Even if the section is shifted to the advantageous section, the section display start condition is not satisfied and the section display is not performed. That is, when the sub-control unit 91 shifts the presentation mode on the liquid crystal display device 51 from the preparatory production to the normal production, and it is suggested that the game state has shifted to the inside, the section display is not performed. Instead, the section display LED 12a is maintained in the off state (see FIG. 9A).

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 performs the in-preparation effect to be performed when the sub-control unit is controlled to the non-inside.
By terminating when the transition from non-inside to inside is made, the normal effect is started, and when the inside effect is controlled, the in-preparation effect is not performed and the normal effect is controlled. In this configuration, the inside suggestion indicating that the non-inside inside is moved to the inside is executed by the completion of the preparation effect and the start of the normal effect. As a result, in the case where the state shifts from the non-inside to the inside, the sub controller 91 executes the inside suggestion so that the payout rate of the medals becomes appropriate in the situation where the game is played on the game shop side. It is possible to identify things.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 displays an internal suggestion indicating that the game state has been moved to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game in which the game state is changed from the non-inside to the inside. It can be performed using the device 51. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display the section using the section display LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The position at which the internal suggestion is executed and the position at which the section display is performed are different, and the timing at which the internal suggestion is executed and the timing at which the section display is performed are different. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the suggestion that the inside is indicated by the inside suggestion and the suggestion that the transition to the advantageous section is made by the section indication.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 can display the in-preparation screen and the non-interior in-progress image on the liquid crystal display 51 during the preparation effect, and the game state controlled by the main control unit 41 side is When the game is not in the internal state, the in-preparation screen and the image in the non-internal state are displayed to indicate that the game is in the state of being prepared and the game state is controlled to the non-internal state. When the game state controlled on the side of 41 is a special state rather than a non-internal state, the non-internal medium suggestion image is not displayed, and only the in-preparation image is displayed. In addition, the game state is suggested to be controlled to a special state. As a result, after it is specified that the RAM is cleared on the side of the main control unit 41, it is specified that the game state is not yet transferred to the inside and is controlled to the non-inside. At the time of factory shipment of the slot machine 1, etc., in a situation where a game is played on the game store side until the payout rate of medals is within the inside, the non-internal before entering inside or the inside It can be made to recognize whether it is a special state before becoming. In addition, in such a situation, by displaying the in-preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion image by the in-production effect, a predetermined special operation mode (even if the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery It is possible to suggest that it is possible to keep the medal payout rate inside by performing (operation mode in which (BB) is difficult to win). Also,
In such a situation, by not displaying the non-internal suggestion image by the preparation effect, it can be suggested that it is not necessary to play the game in the special operation mode until the special state is ended.

In addition, the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state in which the navigation is informed while controlling the inside of the advantageous zone, and after the transition to the advantageous zone, the navigation control is first performed. By controlling the section display in the game, it is possible to display the section when the advantageous section is controlled in the inside, but when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal section, the section display is displayed. It is a configuration that is not executed. Thereby, while the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside, while the payout rate of medals is incorrect inside non-internal, the medal payout rate is controlled to an advantageous section inside In this case, the section display can be executed, but when the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the section display is not executed when the advantage section is controlled during non-internal, so the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. In the situation where the game is played on the game shop side until the middle, the unnecessary section display is not executed.

It should be noted that the preparation in preparation is only required to suggest that at least the main control unit 41 has not moved to the inside where the payout rate of medals is appropriate, and only the preparation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 5.
It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is displayed in 1.

In addition, the inside suggestion can at least indicate that the gaming state has transitioned from non-inside to inside while the game is being played at the game store until the payout rate of medals is inside. It is sufficient if the main control unit 41 has a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display device 51 or an effect of controlling a specific LED to be in a lighting state) during a period in which the inside is controlled. , A specific sound is output from the speakers 53, 54), while the specific effect may not be performed during a period during which control is performed during non-internal, or over a period during which control is performed during non-internal. While the specific effect is performed, the specific effect may not be performed during the period of being controlled inside. Further, in these configurations, the specific effect is
It may be performed in one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the gaming state has transitioned from non-internal to internal in a situation where the game is played at the game store side until the medal payout rate is appropriate inside. is there.

In addition, the inside suggestion can at least indicate that the gaming state has transitioned from non-inside to inside while the game is being played at the game store until the payout rate of medals is inside. If the main control unit 41 side controls the non-inside during the startup, the sub control unit 91 performs the non-inside display effect in the non-inside, and After moving to the inside, the display may not be performed to the inside even if the inside is not performed again. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform an unnecessary internal suggestion after the situation where the game is played on the game store side is completed until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate inside.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal control is suggested according to the effect mode controlled by the sub control section 91, but the main control section 41 may be configured to perform the internal control. Main control unit 41
As a configuration for making an internal suggestion, for example, the main control unit 41 includes an LED display that indicates that the main control unit 41 is not in the interior or in the interior, and is turned on when the LED display is not in the interior. On the other hand, while being controlled, it may be configured so as to indicate that the LED display has been moved to the inside by controlling the LED to be turned off when it is in the interior. Alternatively, the LED display is controlled to be turned off when it is not in the interior. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the internal state has been entered by controlling the lighting state while the internal state is being set. Further, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 includes an LED display device that indicates that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, the main control unit 41 displays the LED display device that provides a suggestion other than the suggestion of inside (for example, a credit display). The display device 11 may have a common configuration with a segment for displaying “.” In the device 11) or a dedicated display device (for example, an LED display device) that only gives an internal suggestion.
May be provided.

Next, the main control unit 41 displays the section display using the section display LED 12a, the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12, and the sub-control unit 91 uses the liquid crystal display 51 to confirm the AT confirmation and the AT effect. Will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 performs AT lottery and controls the AT lottery when the game state is controlled inside and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. After winning, the AT state is transitioned to where the AT is controlled. Then, after shifting to the AT state, it is the start time of the game in which the navigation target winning combination is first won in the internal lottery, and after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated, the stop switches 8L, 8C. ,
Section display is started during the period before the operation of 8R is activated, and the section display LED 12
After the lighting of a is started, the navigation notification is executed to control the game auxiliary display 12 to display the navigation number.

Further, when the main control unit 41 wins the AT lottery, the main control unit 41 indicates that the AT lottery has been won and A
A command capable of specifying the timing of shifting to the T state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when performing the navigation notification, a command capable of specifying the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 notifies the main control unit 41 of the fact that AT control has been confirmed, and the AT effect that indicates that the AT control is being performed. It is possible to use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a navigation effect that suggests the operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when it is determined that the AT lottery has been won based on the command received from the main controller 41, the sub-control unit 91 identifies that the AT lottery has been won. AT is determined at a predetermined timing (at the end of the game one game before the AT state is started in this embodiment) during the period from when the AT lottery is won to when the AT state is transitioned to the AT state. Notify. In the AT confirmation notification, an AT confirmation notification screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image of “AT confirmation !!”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the main controller 41 controls the AT. Notify that it has been confirmed.

Then, at a predetermined timing during the period after the AT confirmation notification is made until the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state (in the present embodiment, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started (the relevant game is At the time of operating the start switch 7 for starting)), the normal effect is switched to the AT effect. In the AT effect, an AT effect screen (an image showing a character flying in outer space) of an effect mode different from the normal effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 51 so that the main control unit 41 side is displayed. It suggests that it is controlled to the AT state.

After that, when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the navigation image according to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification (for example, the navigation indicating the middle left stop operation is performed). Displaying the image (see FIG. 7) on the liquid crystal display 51 suggests an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the main control unit 41, after being controlled inside, shifts to the advantageous section and further shifts to the AT state, and at the start of the game in which the predetermined start condition is satisfied, starts the section display, By controlling the section display LED 12a to be in a lighting state, the fact that the advantageous section has been shifted is notified. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the preparing effect on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game state is controlled to the non-inside by the main controller 41 side, and the preparing effect is performed. At the end of the game in which the game state is changed from non-inside to inside, the state of the game on the liquid crystal display 51 is changed from the preparing stage to the normal stage to change the game state from inside to inside. It seems to suggest that it was moved in.

That is, on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the game state is shifted to the inside, whereas on the zone display LED 12a (game auxiliary display 12), it is suggested that the game zone is shifted to the advantageous zone. In this way, the suggestion that the transition has been made to the inside and the suggestion that the transition has been made to the advantageous section are made at different locations (displays). In addition, a suggestion that the game state has been moved to the inside is a special role in the internal lottery during the non-inside (
BB) is performed at the end of the winning game, whereas the suggestion that the advantageous section has been shifted is made at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied. The suggestion that the transition has been made and the suggestion that the transition has been made to the advantageous section are performed at different timings in one game.

[Regarding section display during error status and setting confirmation status]
The section display during the error state and the setting confirmation state will be described with reference to FIG.

In the control of the section display, the main control unit 41 does not turn off the section display LED 12a during the notification period in which the section display LED 12a is turned on, and continuously controls the section display LED 12a to be on. When displaying the number of medals paid out, error code, navigation number, etc. on the game auxiliary display device 12 during the period, each display device 12L for displaying these
, 12R and the section display LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R) are both turned on.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 can control an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled by detecting the occurrence of an error in the slot machine 1. When the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the section display LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, when the error state is controlled based on the detection of the error, even during the error state While continuously controlling the section display LED 12a to a lighting state,
Using the other segments of the game auxiliary display 12, control is performed so as to display an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred. Then, the error state is released by a predetermined operation, so that the error state is ended and the display of the error code is ended. Even after the error state is ended, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state until the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before the control of the error state.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 side is in the normal state where the main control unit 41 side is not controlled to the error state or the setting confirmation state described later, the sub control unit 91 produces an effect image according to the control state related to the game section or the AT described later, For example, when the control state relating to an AT described later is a non-AT state, a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character walking in the city) is displayed mainly in the non-AT state. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect according to the progress of the game is performed. On the other hand, in the period in which the occurrence of an error is detected on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to the error state, it does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the advantageous section,
The main control unit 41 side displays an error screen (in this embodiment, character screen) that shows an error code that can specify the type of error that triggered the error state and information about the error (for example, a cancellation method). An image and a character image indicating an error code) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and control is performed so as to indicate that the error state is controlled.

In this way, when the main control unit 41 controls to the advantageous section and controls the section display LED 12a to the lighting state, if the game state is shifted to the error state that disables the progress of the game, the game assistance Since the display device 12 is caused to display an error code capable of specifying the error state and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in a lighting state, the game auxiliary display device 12
Based on the display content of, the player can be made aware that the error state is controlled and the advantageous section is controlled. In addition, it is possible to let the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before the transition to the error state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 displays an error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the main control unit 41 shifts to the error state while controlling the section display LED 12a to the lighting state while controlling the advantageous section. At the same time, while controlling the section display LED 12a to be kept in a lighting state, the sub control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the advantageous section, and an error code and information about the error. (For example, the releasing method)
Since the control is performed as suggested by using, for example, it is possible to play the game based on the contents of the effect produced by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like in the state where the progress of the game is disabled on the side of the main control unit 41. It is possible to prevent the user from erroneously recognizing that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the main control unit 41 detects an operation of turning on the setting key switch 37 by a predetermined key operation in a state where no game is played, Control is made to shift to the setting confirmation state, to disable the progress of the game, and to display the set value currently set in the slot machine 1 on the set value display 24,
After that, by detecting an operation of turning off the setting key switch 37 by a predetermined key operation, it is possible to end the setting confirmation state, the game section is controlled to an advantageous section, and the section display LED 12a is displayed. When shifting to the setting confirmation state while controlling to the lighting state, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to the lighting state even during the setting confirmation state, and the set value display 24 (not shown) is displayed. Control to display the set value. Then, even after the setting confirmation state is ended, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state until the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before shifting to the setting confirmation state.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 side is in the normal state in which the main control unit 41 side is not controlled to the setting confirmation state or the above-mentioned error state, the sub control unit 91 displays the normal effect screen (in the present embodiment, An image showing that the character is walking around the city) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect according to the progress of the game is performed. On the other hand, during the period in which the main control unit 41 controls the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 side does not suggest that the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 side controls the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation state screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image indicating the setting confirmation state) indicating that the setting confirmation state is displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the setting confirmation state is controlled. Control so as to suggest that.

In this way, the main control unit 41 disables the progress of the game and is currently set on the set value display 24 while controlling the advantageous section and controlling the section display LED 12a to the lighting state. When the state is changed to the setting confirmation state in which the set value is displayed, the section display LED 12a
Is controlled to be kept in a lighting state, so based on the display contents of the game auxiliary display device 12,
It is possible for the player to recognize that it is controlled to the advantageous section. Further, it is possible to let the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before the shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the main control section 41 controls the section to be in the advantageous section and controls the section display LED 12a to be in the lighting state, the main control section 41 causes the set value display 24 (not shown) to move to the setting confirmation state. While the set value is displayed and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lighting state, the sub control section 91 does not suggest that the main control section 41 side is controlled to the advantageous section, and confirms the setting. The liquid crystal display 51 and the like are used to indicate the state.
As a result, in the state where the progress of the game is disabled on the side of the main control unit 41, it is erroneously recognized as being controlled to an advantageous section in which the game can be played based on the contents of the effect produced by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

[Regarding the restart order of section display and navigation notification when power is restored]
After the power failure to stop the power supply to the slot machine 1 occurs, the restart order of the section display and the navigation notification when returning from the power failure will be described with reference to FIG. 11.

When the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption process (not shown) in the timer interrupt process, and the registers of the main control unit 41 before the power interruption and the RAM 41c. Since the data set in the predetermined area of the slot machine 1 is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c that is backed up by the backup power supply and the backup power is supplied to hold the data, the slot machine 1 It is possible to return to the control state before the power failure when the power supply to the power source is restarted. In particular, in the control state before the power interruption, whether or not the navigation notification was performed, the content of the navigation notification when the navigation notification was performed, whether it was controlled to an advantageous section, whether the stop operation was effective Can be specified.

In addition, when the power supply of AC 100V is stopped, the sub control unit 91 executes the power interruption process similarly to the main control unit 41, so that the control state of each effect device before the power supply is stopped. Is controlled by the backup power source to be held in the storage means, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, each effect device can be returned to the control state before the power failure. . In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, it is possible to specify whether or not the navigation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 51 and the content of the navigation effect when the navigation effect is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and the AT is controlled and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the section display LE is displayed.
The D12a is controlled to the lit state, the navigation notification is performed, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12. When at least one reel is rotation-controlled after the start of the game, the stop valid LED of the corresponding reel is controlled to the lighting state. At this time, on the side of the sub-control unit 91, a navigation effect is performed, and a navigation image indicating the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power is cut off, as shown in FIG. 11B, the section display LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop valid LED.
22L, 22C, 22R and the liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off and the reel 2
All of L, 2C and 2R will be stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the main controller 41 restarts the power supply to the slot machine 1 and restarts, before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. By restarting the rotation control of the reel that has been rotationally controlled (not shown), the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed. The display of the operation mode of the stop switch by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 and the lighting control of the section display LED 12a are simultaneously restarted, and the navigation notification and the section display are restarted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11D, the main control unit 41 causes all of the reels for which the rotation control is restarted to rotate at a constant speed, so that the stop switch corresponding to the reels that are performing the rotation control is turned on. The lighting control of the stop valid LED is restarted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11E, the main control unit 41 restarts the reel rotation control, the navigation notification, the section display, and the stop valid LED lighting control. When it is specified that the return process has been completed, the sub control unit 91 restarts the control of the navigation effect and displays the navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51, which indicates the operation mode notified by the navigation notification. To restart.

Thereby, the section display LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop effective LED, the reel,
The control state of the liquid crystal display 51 is restored to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

As described above, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are being performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, so that the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is changed. When returning to the state before the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 controls to simultaneously restart the lighting of the section display LED 12a and the navigation notification display of the game auxiliary display device 12. As a result, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display device 12 is restarted before the section display by the section display LED 12a is restarted, and the navigation notification is issued even though the section display does not notify that the section is an advantageous section. Can be prevented from being restarted.

In the present embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect in the advantageous section is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, the section display LED 12a is turned on and the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Although it is a configuration to restart at the same time, after restarting the lighting of the section display LED 12a, it is also possible to restart the display of the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12, and in such a configuration, the section display by the section display LED 12a is restarted It is possible to prevent the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display device 12 from being restarted before being performed.

The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and RO
Various processes are executed according to the program stored in M41b. After the activation, first, the activation setting process is executed to initialize the internal register of the main control unit 41, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a predetermined output port, and the like, and then the main process is executed. The main process is
This process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of game.

Hereinafter, the control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the main process, first, a game start waiting process (Sa1) described later that waits until the game is started is executed. After that, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery is executed when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game (Sa2).

In the internal lottery process, based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is operated in the step of Sa1, whether to allow the winning of each lottery target combination to be the lottery target of the internal lottery ( That is, a process of determining whether or not to permit the derivation of a predetermined display result) is performed. Then, a winning number capable of specifying which lottery target winning combination (including loss) is won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Each lottery target combination is assigned a role number in advance, and if any of the lottery target roles is won in the internal lottery, the winning lottery target role number is set as the winning number. When the winning target of the lottery is also desired to be won, that is, when the winning is lost, 0 is set as the winning number.

Then, after the internal lottery process is executed in the step Sa2, a payout control process, which will be described later, is executed to perform a process relating to the game section (Sa3). After that, a reel control process for controlling to rotate and stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed (Sa4).

In the reel control process, after the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after performing control to rotate all reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined rotation speed,
Control is performed to stop the corresponding reel according to the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the reel control process ends when the stop control is completed for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released (the push operation of the stop switch is completed). To be done.

In the reel control process, after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, all the reels rotate at a constant speed, so that the left / middle right / stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are controlled to be in a lighting state. To do. After that, by operating the stop switch for the spinning reel, the stop valid LED of the corresponding stop switch is controlled to the off state.

In the reel control process, after stopping the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols forming the winning combination on the pay line LN is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred. Then, when a winning has occurred, a winning flag that can specify the winning combination for which a winning has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the reel control process is executed in step Sa4, an AT state management process, which will be described later, is executed to execute a process related to the end of the advantageous section (Sa5). After that, a medal payout process, which will be described later, is performed to perform a process related to the payout of medals according to the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a result of the game (Sa6). After that, when the re-game combination is won, a re-game operation time process, which will be described later, for performing a process for giving a re-game is executed (Sa7).

After the re-game operation time process is executed in the step Sa7, the advantageous interval flag is set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous interval flag can be set by the payout control process in the step Sa3 (Sa8). It is determined whether it has been done (Sa9).

When it is determined that the flag during the advantageous period is not set in the step Sa9,
State control data (extinguished) for controlling the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a to the extinguished state
Is read into a predetermined register (for example, the accumulator register of the main CPU 41a) (Sa10), and the status control data (light off) of the predetermined register is played in the output buffer provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is set to an output buffer corresponding to an output port that outputs a control signal to the eighth segment on the right display 12R of the auxiliary display 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an interval display LED output buffer) (Sa11).
). Then, an interrupt once waiting process of waiting until the timer interrupt process is performed once is performed (Sa12), and by the LED dynamic display process described later executed in the timer interrupt process, the right display unit 12R of the game auxiliary display unit 12R. After the eighth segment, that is, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in the off state, the process proceeds to step Sa13. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Sa9 that the flag during the advantageous period is set, Sa10 to Sa10
The process proceeds to step Sa13 without performing the processes of step 12.

When the interrupt once waiting process is performed in step Sa12, or when it is determined in step Sa9 that the during-advantage period flag is set, a predetermined area of RAM 41c is initialized with the end of the game. Perform the setting process at the end of the game
Sa13). In the game end setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data used only for the game (for example, data indicating a winning result of a general combination in the internal lottery) is stored is set as an initialization target. In addition, when a special role is won in the game and control of the special state is started, or when control of the special state is ended, data regarding the special state (for example, data indicating the type of the special state or A predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data for counting the number of paid-out medals in the special state is stored is set as an initialization target. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the initialization target will be initialized at the start of the next game by the game start waiting process described above.

After the game end time setting process is executed in step Sa13, the process returns to step Sa1 to repeat steps Sa1 to Sa13. When the main processing completes one cycle, the processing relating to the control of one unit of the game ends, and the main processing is repeatedly executed for each one unit of the game.

In the main processing, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game, is set in the command queue, and the processing of transmitting the command to the sub control unit 91 is appropriately executed.

Further, in the main process of the present embodiment, when the flag during the advantageous period is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the interval display LED output buffer is displayed every time the game in which the flag during the advantageous period is not set is finished. The configuration is such that the process for setting the state control data (light off) is performed, but when the advantageous zone flag is not set and the zone display LED 12a is in the lighting state, the state is output to the zone display LED output buffer. It may be configured to set control data (light off). In such a configuration, the flag during the advantageous section is not set, and the section display LE is displayed.
Only when the D12a is in the lighting state, it is possible to set the state control data (light off) in the section display LED output buffer and perform processing for turning off the section display LED 12a.
The processing load can be reduced.

In this way, in the main process, when the flag during the advantageous section is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the section display LED 12a (the eighth display of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12).
Set the status control data (lighting) to the output buffer of the segment and display the section display LED.
While the lighting mode of 12a is controlled to the lighting state, when the flag in the advantageous section is not set, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and the section display LED 12a is turned on. By controlling the mode to the off state, the navigation is first notified after the start of the advantageous period, and the advantageous period is ended from the start of the game in which the payout rate (payout number / bet number) can exceed 100%. During the period until the end of the game, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state to notify that the advantageous section is being controlled.

In the main process, after executing the predetermined process including the game start waiting process and the reel control process, if the flag during the advantageous section is not set, the state control data (light off) is output to the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. Is set, and the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a is controlled to the unlit state. The reel control process is configured to end when the third stop operation is finished (the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released), and after the third stop operation is finished, The display LED 12a is controlled to be off. And section display L
After the ED 12a is controlled to be in the off state, the game end setting process is executed, and the process returns to the game start waiting process of the first step, so that the main process is completed. That is, in the main process, control is performed to switch the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a to the unlit state within a period after the third stop operation in the game is finished and before the game start waiting process of the next game is started. It can be done.

In the main process, after performing the internal lottery process, while performing the reel control process, the payout control process is performed to control the advantageous section, and when the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied, Set the status control data (lighting) in the display LED output buffer and display the section display LED1.
Since 2a is controlled to be in a lighting state, a stop switch for stopping the reel is started at the start of a game in which a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied and after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. Before the operation of 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on, and the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section is being controlled.

Further, in the main process, after performing the reel control process and the re-game operation time process, it is determined whether or not the advantage zone flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantage zone flag is not set. In this case, since the state control data (light-out) is set in the section display LED output buffer to turn off the section display LED 12a, when ending the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section (end condition 1, end) At the end of the game in which at least one of the condition 2 and the end condition 3) is satisfied, the section display LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

[About the game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start waiting process, first, the replay medal counter value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into a predetermined register, and the replay medal counter is initialized and set to 0. (Sb1). In the re-play medal counter, a new game is played when the re-play combination is won and the re-play is given in the previous game by the re-game operation time process in the main process of the previous game. A numerical value (3 in this embodiment) corresponding to the specified number of bets necessary for this is set. On the other hand, when the re-play is not given in the previous game, the value when initialized in the step Sb1 (
0) is maintained.

Then, it is determined whether or not the replay medal counter value is larger than 0 based on the value read into the predetermined register in the step Sb1 (Sb2). Then, when it is determined in step Sb2 that the re-play medal counter value is greater than 0, that is, when the re-play is given in the previous game, the medal insertion execution process is performed (Sb3).

In the medal insertion execution processing, the betting number is set to the replay medal counter value read in the predetermined register in the step Sb1, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lit state, and the specified number (in the present embodiment, the specified number is set. The control is performed so as to notify that the bet amount of 3) is set. When setting the bet number, the value of the predetermined register in which the replay medal counter value is read in the step Sb1 is subtracted by 1, the bet number is incremented by 1, and the bet number after the addition 1 to After setting the 3BETLEDs 14 to 16 in the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 to 3BETLEDs 14 to 16 in the lighting state by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interruption process is repeated until the re-play medal counter value becomes 0, When the replay medal counter value becomes 0, the processing for setting the bet number is completed,
Every time the bet number is incremented by one, the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to be in a lighting state. It should be noted that, by adding the re-play medal counter value to the bet number at one time, 1 to 3 BE
Set all the TLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state and perform 1 to 3 by the LED dynamic display processing.
By controlling the BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state, one timer interrupt process
All of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 may be controlled to be turned on at the same time.

After performing the medal insertion execution process in step Sb3, medal care permission setting process is performed (Sb4). If it is determined in step Sb2 that the replay medal counter value is not greater than 0, that is, if the replay game has not been given in the previous game, the process of step Sb3 is not executed and Sb4 is executed. And the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed.

In the medal care permission setting process, the credit value set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is a vacant credit, If the value of the bet number that has been set does not reach the specified number (3 in the present embodiment) and there is a vacancy in the bet number, the value from the medal shooting unit 4 is referred to. A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the medal insertion is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the present embodiment, in the medal care permission setting process, the medal care permission flag is set when there is a vacancy in the credit regardless of whether or not the re-game is given. If the credit is available, the medal maintenance permission flag is not set even if the credit is available, and the bet number is available, or the credit is available and the replay is not provided. The medal maintenance permission flag may be set.

After performing the medal maintenance permission setting process in the step Sb4, an interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sb5). By performing the one-time interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is performed and the detection states of various switches, the lighting states of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection states of these various switches are updated. After that, subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing and operation input acceptance processing described later) can be performed.

After performing one interrupt waiting process and one timer interrupt in step Sb5,
The RAM 4 in which the medal care permission flag can be set by the medal care permission setting process described above.
By referring to the predetermined area 1c, it is determined whether or not the medal maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

When it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and the medals are controlled to be taken into the slot machine 1. In addition, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to a lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed so as to notify that it is in a state in which medals can be inserted. After the lighting mode of the closing request LED 17 is set to the lighting state, the timer interruption process is executed and the LED dynamic display process is performed, so that the closing request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Then, after the insertion request LED 17 is turned on in the step Sb8, the medal detection process is performed (Sb9). If it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the process of step Sb7 and step Sb8 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step Sb9 to perform medal detection processing.

In the medal detection process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the output signal of the inserted medal sensor 31 (hereinafter, also referred to as a medal insertion signal) or the transition of the medal insertion signal. The state of inserting medals is determined based on the transition of the input signal. Then, when the insertion of a normal medal is detected, processing for setting the bet number and accepting the medal for the credit is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormal insertion of a medal is detected, an error process for controlling the error state that disables the progress of the game is performed. The error state is released by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38. Note that when the error state is released, if the abnormality (for example, clogging of medals within the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31) that caused the control to the error state is not resolved, It will be controlled to an error state.

After performing the medal detection process in step Sb9, the operation input acceptance process for accepting the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the operation for the various switches and performing the operation of the switch for which the operation is enabled. Perform (Sb10).

In the operation input acceptance process, when the number of credits set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the MA is set.
The acceptance of the operation by the XBET switch 6 is validated. Also, when the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is validated. Also,
When the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

Further, in the operation input acceptance process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. After that, by setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is switched to the medal payout opening 9 side, and the inserted medals are played by the player. Control to return to. When the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected and the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected, the set value display processing for displaying the set value on the set value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement processing for returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. Further, when the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected and the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the bet number is set to a bet number up to a predetermined number based on credits within a possible range. A process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit is performed. After performing the process according to the switch in which the operation is detected, the operation input acceptance process is ended.

After the operation input acceptance process is performed in step Sb10, it is determined based on the start flag whether a valid operation by the start switch 7 has been detected (Sb11). When it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the valid operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to the step Sb12, and the start valid LED is displayed.
A start valid LED display process for controlling the lighting mode of 18 is performed (Sb12).

In the start valid LED display processing, the reset switch 23 is activated when the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid by the operation input acceptance processing in the step Sb10.
When the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start valid LED 18 is set to the lighting state, while the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to the valid state. And start switch 7
When the operation by is not set to be valid, the start valid LED 18 is set to the off state. Accordingly, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start valid LE is set.
By controlling D18 to be in a lighting state, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is effective. In addition, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state, but the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not set to be valid, the start is valid. By controlling the LED 18 to be off, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is invalid.

After performing the start valid LED display process in step Sb12, the process returns to step Sb5, and the processes in steps Sb5 to Sb12 are repeated until it is determined in step Sb11 that a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected. To do. After performing the start valid LED display process in the step Sb12, the interrupt valid waiting process is performed in the step Sb5, so that the start valid LED 18 becomes the start valid LED.
The lighting mode set by the display process is controlled.

In the step Sb11, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random number value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42, and the predetermined value of the RAM 41c is acquired. The area is set (Sb13). afterwards,
The start valid LED 18 and the closing request LED 17 are set to the off state (Sb14, Sb1
5), clear the medal maintenance permission flag from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and control to clear the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb17), terminate the game start waiting process, and finish the main process. Return to processing.

After that, in the main process, the internal lottery process of performing the internal lottery using the random number value for internal lottery acquired in the step Sb13, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in response to the operation of the start switch 7 being detected. One game is started by performing a reel control process of starting the rotation and stopping the corresponding reel in response to the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

In this way, in the game start waiting process, when the re-game is given, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the bet number for performing the re-game is set, and the 1 to 3 bet LEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. Control sequentially.

Further, in the game start waiting process, the medal maintenance permission flag is set, and when at least one of the credit and the bet number is empty and the medal can be inserted, the flow of the medal inserted from the medal inserting section 4 is started. The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state so as to switch the path to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the closing request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, by performing the start valid LED display process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, While the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the lighting state, the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, but when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is valid. If it is not set to, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to the off state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when the operation input acceptance process detects a valid operation of the start switch 7, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the payout number display of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By setting to clear, after that, the timer interrupt processing is performed, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are controlled to be in the off state, and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

Further, in the game start waiting process, it is possible to perform the process (Sb8) of setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17 after performing the medal insertion execution process (Sb3). The number of bets is set in association with the replay game, and 1 to 3 BETLED1
After the 4 to 16 are sequentially controlled to the lighting state, the closing request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, in the series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the interrupt once waiting process (Sb5), the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17 is set (Sb8).
) Is performed, and the start valid LED display process (Sb12) can be further performed.
By the timer interrupt processing after the D display processing (Sb12) is performed, the closing request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 can be controlled to be in the lighting state at the same time.

[About payout control processing]
The control content of the payout control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout control process, first, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to,
The section information that can specify the currently controlled game section is acquired (Sc1). Section information is
The initial value is a value indicating that the currently controlled game section is a normal section, and is updated to a value indicating an advantageous section by the corresponding process of the payout control process or the AT state management process described later. It can be done.

Then, based on the section information acquired in step Sc1, it is determined whether the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section (Sc2). When it is determined in step Sc2 that the currently controlled game section is not the advantageous section, the internal lottery is referred to by which internal lottery target winning combination (including loss) is won by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. An identifiable winning number is acquired (Sc3), and it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery target combination performing an advantageous zone transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous zone has been won (Sc4). In the internal lottery, each internal lottery target combination is assigned a winning number in advance, and among the internal lottery target winning combinations, the advantageous zone transition lottery target winning combination is assigned a role number within a predetermined range in advance. Has been. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning target of the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, based on whether or not the winning combination number of the internal lottery target specified based on the winning number is within a predetermined range. ing.

Then, when it is determined in step Sc4 that the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination has been won, the advantageous section transition lottery processing for performing the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (Sc5). After that, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the advantageous section is shifted to (Sc).
6). When it is determined that the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the step of Sc6, the section information update data (advantage section) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc7), and the update data (the advantageous data) acquired in the predetermined register ( Using the (advantageous section), the section information is updated to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sc8). As a result, the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game based on the section information (value indicating the advantageous section) updated in the game, and the advantageous game described later is set as the first game of the advantageous section. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted by the number counter.

Then, the advantageous section start time setting process is performed to set the advantageous section that is started when the advantageous section transition lottery is won (Sc9). The advantageous section start time setting processing is performed during the processing of initializing the end condition (arbitrary end condition, etc.) of the advantageous section which is started according to the type of winning advantageous zone transition lottery target winning combination. A process of setting a lottery table used for AT lottery, a process of setting various counters used in the advantageous section, and the like are performed.

Then, after the advantageous section start time setting process is performed in step Sc9, the payout control process is ended and the process returns to the main process. In addition, if it is determined in step Sc4 that the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination has not been won based on the winning number, or if it is determined in step Sc6 that the advantageous zone transition lottery has not been won, Sc5- The payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing each process of the step Sc9.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2 that the currently controlled game section is the advantageous section, the number of games continuously controlled to the advantageous section (hereinafter may be referred to as the advantageous section game number) is determined. After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c for counting (Sc10), the payout state information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (control state regarding the currently controlled AT) Information that can be specified)
After the currently controlled payout status (control status related to AT) is acquired in a predetermined register (S
c11), the payout state-related process for executing the process related to the currently controlled payout state is performed (Sc12).

In the payout status-related processing, the payout status acquired in a predetermined register at the start of the processing,
That is, the process related to the currently controlled payout state is performed. Main control unit 4 of this embodiment
1 can be controlled to a non-AT state, a precursory state, an AT state, and an additional state A to C as a payout state (control state related to AT), and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the payout state-related processing. , The current control state is terminated, and control is performed to shift to the control state according to the established transition condition. In addition, various processes are performed according to the currently controlled payout state.

Further, in the payout state-related processing, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the non-internal state in each game, and when it is determined that the game state is in the non-internal state, the above-described arbitrary end condition (end condition for the advantageous section) An arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag indicating that 3) is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c,
The control is performed so as to end the advantageous section. As a result, when the gaming section is shifted to the advantageous section while the gaming state is controlled to be in the non-internal, the game next to the game shifted to the advantageous section, that is, 1 of the advantageous section in the non-internal section. The game is controlled so that the advantageous section is ended.

Further, in the payout state-related processing, as will be described later, the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, and when the section display start condition for starting the section display described above is satisfied (in the present embodiment, shift to the advantageous section). After being played, the game is first controlled to the AT state, and in the AT state, the navigation target is first elected in the internal lottery and the navigation is notified by the control of the AT, that is, first after the start of the advantageous section. A navigation notification is given, and at the start of a game in which the payout rate (payout number / bet number) can exceed 100%, an advantageous section flag indicating that section display is started is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, It is controlled to start the control of the section display by the section display LED 12a.

After performing the payout state-related processing in step Sc12, is the arbitrary finish condition fulfillment flag set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the finish condition fulfillment flag can be set by the payout state relating processing? Based on whether or not the arbitrary termination condition is satisfied, it is determined (Sc13). When the arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag is set and it is determined that the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc14) to set the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After performing the advantageous period end flag setting process in step Sc14, whether the advantageous period flag is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantage state flag can be set by the payout state-related process. It is determined whether or not (Sc15). If it is determined in step Sc13 that the arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of step sc14 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step sc15 to proceed to the advantageous zone flag. It is determined whether or not is set (Sc15).

When it is determined in step Sc15 that the during-advantageous zone flag is set, state control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the zone display LED 12a to the lighting state is read into a predetermined register ( Sc16), after setting the status control data (lighting) of the predetermined register in the section display LED output buffer (Sc17), perform an interrupt once waiting process (Sc18), which will be described later in the timer interrupt process. By the LED dynamic display processing, the display mode of the eighth segment, that is, the section display LED 12a on the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the lighting state. After that, the instruction setting process for executing the setting of the navigation notification is performed (Sc19). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc15 that the during-advantage interval flag is not set, the processes in steps Sc16 to Sc18 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step sc19 to perform the instruction setting process (sc19).

In the instruction setting process, the control state (ball-out state) regarding the AT is controlled to the AT state,
In addition, if the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery and it is specified that the navigation target lottery has been won, the navigation notification according to the navigation target winning combination is executed, and the player is notified according to the navigation target winning combination. The sub-control unit 91 is informed of an operation mode (for example, the pressing order, operation timing, etc.) of the advantageous stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command capable of specifying the operation mode. Control to send to. On the other hand, when the control state relating to the AT is not controlled to the AT state, the stop notifications 8L and 8C, which are advantageous to the player, do not execute the navigation notification even if the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery. Control is performed so that a command that can specify the operation mode of 8R is not transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After the instruction setting process is performed in step Sc19, the payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the payout control process, the section is controlled to the advantageous section, and when the predetermined section display start condition is satisfied, the state control data (lighting) is set in the section display LED output buffer, and the section display LED is turned on. Since the display mode of the display LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied, the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on to display the section display LE.
It is possible to inform that the advantageous section is controlled by D12a.

Further, in the payout control process, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the advantageous section game number counter is always incremented by 1 for each game, and the number of games played during the advantageous section is counted. Thereby, in the AT state management process described later, the number of games played during the advantageous period is the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous period game number counter.
When it is determined that the advantageous section has been reached, the advantageous section will be controlled to end, so the advantageous section will not exceed the upper limit number of games, and the payout rate of medals will be too long-term. Can be prevented.

In the payout control process of the present embodiment, when the section display start condition is satisfied, that is, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first performed, and the payout rate (payout number / bet count) exceeds 100%. At the start of the game to be obtained, the section display LED 12a is controlled so as to start the section display. However, in the section display, the navigation notification is first given after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) may start at a predetermined timing in the period until the game in which the payout rate (payout number / bet number) may exceed 100%. The configuration in which the section display is started, the configuration in which the section display is started by playing a predetermined number of games after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game section is After being migrated advantageously interval from normal interval, a predetermined symbol combination reel 2L predetermined, 2C, section displays may be configured such that is started by stopping the 2R.

In the payout control process of the present embodiment, the section display is started at the start of a game in which the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section and the payout rate (payout number / bet number) may exceed 100%. Is
Although it is configured to end with the end of the advantageous section, the section display is such that a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the period from the start of the advantageous section to the end of the advantageous section (for example,
The configuration may be such that the AT state is terminated once).

In the payout control processing, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is not internal, it is determined that the advantageous condition end condition 3 is satisfied. By determining and controlling to end the advantageous section at the end of the game, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts. Thus, in a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside, while the payout rate of medals is not appropriate in the non-internal, when the advantageous section is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal Since the advantageous section is ended in the game that started, even if the advantageous section is controlled in a situation where the game is played at the game store side until the medal payout rate is within the proper range, the player can play the game before playing the game. The advantageous section will end, and the player will not play the game in the advantageous section, that is, in the state where the advantageous state has been shifted to the advantageous state, so fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the advantageous section when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit as a condition for ending the advantageous section. In such a structure, if the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal inside and the advantageous section is not ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts, the advantageous section transferred in the non-internal section moves to the inside. Will continue after the transition. Then, in the advantageous section transferred to the non-inside, as compared with the advantageous section transferred to the inside, the number of games that can be played in the inside until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is If the game is played by the player in the advantageous section that is shifted to the non-internal, the fairness will be lost. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. Even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game is played on the game store side until the inside becomes, the advantageous section ends before the player plays the game, and the fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the non-internal state in each game in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is in the non-internal section, the advantageous section is ended at the end of the game. By controlling so that when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts. For example, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal only in the first game of the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration or the like for controlling the end of the section may be used.

[About AT status management processing]
The control content of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the AT state management process, first, section information set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Sd1). Then, based on the section information, it is determined whether the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section (Sd2).

When it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled game section is the advantageous section, the advantageous section end flag can be set by the above-mentioned payout control process RAM41.
With reference to the predetermined area of c, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone end flag is set (Sd
3). When it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous zone end flag is not set, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous zone game number counter updated in the payout control process is referred to ( Sd4), based on the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number has reached the upper limit game number (1500 games in this embodiment) (Sd5).

If it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of advantageous-zone games has not reached the upper limit, the number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the payout in the advantageous zone). A net increase counter for counting the total number of medals that is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous section from the total number of medals) (Sd6), and the net increase number counter value Is acquired in a predetermined register as a net increase number value. Then, the payout amount value of the medal to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, and the payout amount value is added to the net increase amount value of the predetermined register (Sd7). After that, the bet numerical value set in the game is specified, and the bet numerical value is subtracted from the net increased number value of the predetermined register to calculate a new net increased number value (Sd8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increase number value calculated in the predetermined register is 0 or more (Sd9).

When it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increase number value of the predetermined register is not 0 or more, the net increase number value of the predetermined register is set to 0 (Sd10), and then the process proceeds to step Sd11. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increase value of the predetermined register is 0 or more, the process of step Sd10 is not performed, the net increase value of the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to step Sd11. .

In the step Sd11, the net increase number value set in the predetermined register is set to the specified number (in the present embodiment, 2388 (the upper limit number 2400 is subtracted from the maximum value (15) of payout number in the slot machine 1), and It is determined whether or not the maximum number (three cards) used for setting the bet number is exceeded) (Sd11). In the step Sd11, if it is determined that the net number increase value of the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number, the net number increase value of the predetermined register is set to RA.
By setting the net increase counter in a predetermined area of M41c, the net increase counter value is updated to a new net increase value (Sd12).

After the net increase counter is updated to the new net increase value in step Sd12, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Also, when it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled game section is not the advantageous section, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous zone end flag is set, or if it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number,
If it is determined in step Sd11 that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sd13, and the data related to the control during the advantageous zone is stored in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) for initializing a predetermined area and ending the advantageous section is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of divisions (2 in this embodiment) of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the processing is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area divisions (Sd13). .. Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, number of included addresses) correspond to the value indicated by the number of sections. ROM 41b storing the set table)
The address of the storage area is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sd14). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the initialization target area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the head address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired as the initialization target RAM address. It is set in a predetermined register (C) (Sd15).

Then, after the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16
), RAM4 corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C)
By setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of 1c, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd17). afterwards,
By incrementing the value of the predetermined register (C) by 1, the initialization target RAM address is incremented by 1 (
Sd18).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the remaining address number is subtracted from 1 (Sd19), and then it is determined whether or not the remaining address number is larger than 0 (Sd20). Sd20
When it is determined that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than 0 in step (4), the process returns to step Sd17, and the processes of Sd17 to Sd20 are repeated until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. As a result, the storage area of the number of storage areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table is the initialization data. It is initialized.

When it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the value of the predetermined register (D) RAM4 to be initialized by subtracting 1
The value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of 1c is subtracted by 1 (Sd21), and the value indicated by the number of divisions after subtraction is 0.
(Sd22), and if the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to the step Sd15 to determine the number of storage areas to be initialized next based on the value indicated by the number of partitions. The value is acquired from the RAM initialization table and set in the predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the initialization target area, and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is set to R.
A predetermined register (C) is acquired from the AM initialization table and is set as an initialization target RAM address.
After setting to (Sd15), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set to the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), and each processing of steps Sd16 to Sd20 is repeated until the number of addresses becomes 0. And the RAM corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D)
The storage area of 41c is initialized. By repeating the processes in steps Sd15 to Sd22 until the number of partitions of the storage area becomes 0, R specified by the number of partitions is determined.
A predetermined storage area of the AM 41c is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c by the advantageous section data initialization processing (hereinafter referred to as the advantageous section data). May be called.) By initializing a predetermined area storing therein, data relating to the control in the advantageous section and data relating to the control of the AT state,
For example, an AT game number counter, an advantageous section game number counter, a net increase number counter, an advantage section flag, etc. are initialized, and the advantage section is ended and the AT state is ended. By performing the advantageous period data initialization process, for example, even when the AT game number counter value is 1 or more and the assigned AT game number remains without being consumed, the advantageous period is ended. Since the AT game number counter and the like are initialized, the AT game number and the like given during the advantageous section cannot be succeeded thereafter.

In the present embodiment, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2 in the advantageous section data initialization process,
The configuration is such that the storage areas in the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c are initialized, but it is also possible to initialize the predetermined one section storage area or the three or more section storage areas in the RAM 41c by the advantageous section data initialization processing.

As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the advantageous section is controlled, of the storage area of the RAM 41c due to the end of the control of the advantageous section. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing a predetermined area in which data related to control in the advantageous section is stored is executed, and control is performed so as to end control of the advantageous section.

Further, in the above-mentioned payout control process, the main control unit 41 RAMs an advantageous period end flag indicating that the advantageous period is ended when an arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied.
It is set in a predetermined area of 41c. Then, in the AT state management process, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous zone end flag is set by the payout control process, if the advantageous zone end flag is set, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed. When the advantageous section end flag is not set while executing the control to end the advantageous section game, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the advantageous section game number is determined. When it is determined that has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to end the control of the advantageous section, and the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the payout control process. In this case, by referring to the advantageous zone end flag, the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games can be omitted, and the control of the advantageous zone can be ended. It has become way.

In the AT state management process, it is advantageous whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) while being controlled in the advantageous section. When it is determined based on the section game number counter value and the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end flag is initialized without setting the advantageous section end flag in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The process is executed to control the advantageous section to end. In addition, the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced by the end condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment).
The number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of advantageous section games (1499 in this embodiment)
It may be a termination condition that is satisfied by exceeding.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when an arbitrary ending condition is satisfied in the payout control process, and then the advantageous section end flag is set in the AT state management process. Based on this, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to control the control of the advantageous section, while the AT state management process presets the number of games controlled in the advantageous section. When the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end flag is not set and the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to end the control of the advantageous section. However, even when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the payout control process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the AT state management process is a predetermined upper limit game. Even when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the number of frames, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section end flag is set, and the advantageous section end flag is set. The configuration may be such that the data initialization process is executed.

In the AT state management process, when the advantageous zone end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number. The advantageous section data is initialized to initialize the advantageous zone data (including the AT state data), thereby ending the advantageous zone.

In the AT state management process, when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended. By setting the specified number as the predetermined number, the advantage over the predetermined number of games can be obtained. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in a section is within a predetermined rate. For example, the specified number is 2388 (2 as the upper limit number).
The maximum value (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from 400 and the maximum number (3) used for setting the number of bets is added) to pay out in the advantageous section. The net number of medals added can be set to 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games can be set to 150% or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from paying out an excessive number of medals in a predetermined period. Note that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone is the predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment).
If the net addition number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined prescribed number (2389 in this embodiment) instead of the end condition that is satisfied by exceeding The same applies when the condition is set. Note that the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is a predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment).
If the net addition number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined prescribed number (2389 in this embodiment) instead of the end condition that is satisfied by exceeding Good as a condition.

In the AT state management process, the advantageous section is ended when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. When the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, ending the advantageous zone prevents the advantageous zone from continuing for a long time, and the net number of medals in the advantageous zone is the specified number. If the AT state and the advantageous section are ended, the advantageous section is prevented from continuing in the case where the payout rate sharply increases even if the number of advantageous section games does not reach the upper limit number. It is like this.

In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous zone. First, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). When it is determined that the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase of medals in the advantageous zone is determined. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) without performing the process of counting the number of coins (Sd6 to Sd10) and the process of determining whether the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the specified number (Sd11). I do. This allows
If the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games and it is determined that the conditions to end the advantageous zone are satisfied, the net increase in medals, which is also the condition to end the advantageous zone, exceeds the specified number. Since the determination process (Sd11) and the process of counting the net number of medals initialized at the end of the advantageous section (Sd6 to Sd10) are not performed, the processing load can be reduced.

In the AT state management processing of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and when it is determined that the advantageous section game number has reached the upper limit number of games. In the case of determining that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether the net number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. However, first, it is determined whether the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. If it is determined that the net number of added medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of net additions does not exceed the specified number while the process of ending is performed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, in terms of the design of the slot machine 1, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as compared with the number of advantageous section games reaching the upper limit number of games. In the configuration that is easily established, it is possible to preferentially determine whether the net number of medals to be added, which is an end condition that is highly likely to be established, exceeds the specified number, and when the end condition is satisfied, the other end The processing load can be reduced without determining the condition.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games ((
Sd5), if it is determined that the number of advantageous zone games has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether the net number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the specified number (Sd11), and the net number of medals is increased. When it is determined that the specified number of sheets has been exceeded, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd1
3 to Sd22) to perform control so as to end the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether or not the net number of medals has exceeded the specified number. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13-) is performed without performing the process (Sd11).
Sd22) is performed to control to end the advantageous section, and either one of the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Both when they are established and when both of them are established in the same game, common advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, if the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number at the same time as the end condition of the advantageous section, either It is possible to end the advantageous period by performing the advantageous period data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without difference from the case where only the above condition is satisfied.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games ((
Sd5), if it is determined that the number of advantageous zone games has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether the net number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the specified number (Sd11), and the net number of medals is increased. When it is determined that the specified number of sheets has been exceeded, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd1
3 to Sd22) to perform control so as to end the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether or not the net number of medals has exceeded the specified number. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13-) is performed without performing the process (Sd11).
Sd22) is performed to control the end of the advantageous section, and it is common when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. This is a configuration in which the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, the common advantageous-segment data is set regardless of whether the number of advantageous-segment games reaches the maximum number of games or the net number of medals in the advantageous segment exceeds the specified number as the condition for ending the advantageous segment. Since the initialization process is performed, it is possible to end the advantageous period by performing the advantageous period data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the medal net increase counter, the net increase counter value is acquired as a net increase value in a predetermined register, the payout amount value is added to the net increase value, and the bet value is subtracted. If the value obtained as a result is less than 0, the net increase counter value is set to 0
16 (a) and 16 (b), the number of medals increased / decreased tends to be smaller than the reference value (the value of the net number of medals at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)). When it is small, the net increase counter value is 0, and when the increase / decrease number of medals is increasing, the increase / decrease number after the increasing tendency is the net increase number counter value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the transition to the advantageous section, the navigation number is not notified and the number of medals increased / decreased tends to decrease. When the counter value is below the initial value (0 in the present embodiment), the net additional number counter value is 0 during the period in which the number of medals increased or decreased is less than the initial value. After that, when the number of medals increases or decreases due to the stop operation being performed according to the navigation notification after being controlled to the AT state, the net additional number counter value is the value corresponding to the net additional number of medals (payout). The value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the number of coins) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the net increase counter value is the reference value when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency, that is, when the increase / decrease number of medals reaches the lowest value, the reference value is set. Is a value indicating the number of sheets increased from.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, the number of medals increased / decreased once exceeds the initial value of the net number increase counter, then decreases, and again falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In this case, the number of medals increases or decreases to 0 during the period when the number is below the initial value. Thereafter, as the number of medals increased or decreased tends to increase, the net increase number counter value is updated by sequentially adding a value corresponding to the net increase number of medals (a value obtained by subtracting the bet numerical value from the payout number value). As a result, the net additional number counter value is set to a value indicating the number of medals increased from the reference value, with the increased / decreased number of medals at the lowest value as the reference value.

In the AT state management process, the calculated value obtained by adding the payout number of medals in the game to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase number counter value is 0 during the advantageous period. If it is larger, the value obtained by adding the payout amount value to the net increase counter value and subtracting the bet value is set and updated in the net increase counter, while if the calculated value is less than 0, When the net increase number counter is set to 0 and updated, and is executed for each game, when the net increase number becomes a negative value in the advantageous section,
The net increase counter is updated to 0, and the net increase counter is updated to start counting the net increase from 0 again. Therefore, the increase width (net increase) of medals in the transition of the actual increase / decrease of medals in the advantageous section is increased. It becomes possible to directly specify it as the number of sheets counter value (FIG. 16).
(See (a)).

In the present embodiment, the process of updating the net increase counter is performed during the advantageous period, so that the net increase in the number of medals is started from the transition to the advantageous period, and the net increase in the advantageous period is started. Although the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net number-of-addition counter is not performed when the AT state is not in the advantageous section, and the processing for updating the net-number-of-increasing counter is performed when the AT state is in the advantageous section. good. Even in such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not made in the AT state and the net additional number of medals does not increase, the net notification number is increased in the AT state and the net additional number of medals increases. The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted in the same manner as the configuration for updating the net increase counter during the middle period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16A, for example, after the transition to the advantageous section, in a period in which the navigation notification is not performed, a payout rate of more than 1 does not occur, and the number of medals increased or decreased to a reference value. If it changes to a lower value, the number of medals increased or decreased from the game in which the navigation was started after the transition to the advantageous section and then to the AT state, and the net increase in the advantageous section in the game Is the least. It should be noted that, even in a period in which the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section, a winning with a payout rate of more than 1 may occur. If a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period so that the number of medals increased or decreased in the period, the net increase in the advantageous period is calculated in the advantageous period game. The least. In addition, if a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period, such that the number of medals increased or decreased once below the reference value during the period, the medals increased or decreased during the period. In the game, the net increase in the number of advantageous sections is the smallest. In this way, the time at which the net increase in number becomes the smallest in the advantageous section may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the medal net increase counter, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment obtains the net increase counter value as a net increase value in a predetermined register and sets the payout value to the net increase value. When the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the net increase counter value is corrected to 0 to increase the net increase in the game in which the increase / decrease in the number of medals has changed from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency. The number counter is reset, and the count of the net added number is reset to 0.
From the time when the net increase is the smallest in the advantageous section, the net increase is counted and the accurate net increase can be counted.

Further, in the present embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous period, the counting of the medal net increase number is started from the transition to the advantageous period, and the net increase in the advantageous period is started. Although the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net number-of-sheets counter may be performed regardless of whether or not it is in the advantageous section. In such a configuration, if the net increase in medals is in an increasing trend in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in medals in the section is succeeded to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stop switch 8L notified by the navigation notification,
By performing the stop operation in the operation modes of 8C and 8R, the payout rate of medals can be set to 1 or more, while the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification are performed. By performing the stop operation in the operation mode, the payout rate of medals becomes less than 1, and in the AT state, the number of medals increased or decreased tends to increase by following the navigation notification, while in other than the AT state In this state, the number of medals increased or decreased tends to decrease. Therefore, by controlling the section display LED 12a to be in the ON state in the AT state, it is a period in which the number of medals increased or decreased in the advantageous section increases. Will be notified.

In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous zone end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous zone is the specified number. In any of the cases where the data exceeds the advantage interval, the common advantage interval data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to obtain the data regarding the advantage interval (A
In the configuration for terminating the advantageous section by initializing (including data regarding the T state), that is, in the AT state management processing, common advantageous section data initialization processing is performed regardless of the end condition of the established advantageous section. In the same manner, the data regarding the advantageous zone is initialized in the same manner, and the advantageous zone is ended, but at the end of the advantageous zone, the data regarding the advantageous zone corresponding to the ending condition of the established advantageous zone is initialized, It may be configured to end.

In the present embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net additional number counter to count the net number of medals in the advantageous section. In the case where a predetermined small winning combination involving the payout of medals is won, regardless of whether or not the predetermined small winning combination has been won and the medals have actually been paid out as a result of the game,
The predetermined small winning combination may be considered to have been won and the medals have been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out may be added to the net added number counter to count the number of medals added in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small winning combination has won and the medals have been paid out, and the medals to be paid out are counted in the net increase counter. Since the predetermined small winning combination is intentionally dropped, it is possible to prevent the number of games in the advantageous section from being intentionally extended without causing the net additional number counter to exceed the specified number.

In addition, when a specified small role is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether the specified small role is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game, the predetermined small role is won and the medal is awarded. In the configuration in which the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone is counted by considering that the payout amount has been paid out and adding the medals corresponding to the payout to the net increase number counter, a small win accompanied by the payout of medals is included in the internal lottery. If a winning combination is won by a player, regardless of whether or not it is possible for the player to reliably win the small winning combination, if the small winning combination wins, In addition to adding the paid-out medals to the net increase counter, if the winning combination of the lottery target including the small winning combination with the payout of medals is won in the internal lottery, the player must make sure that the small winning combination is won. Is possible Even if it is not possible to win the prize in such a situation, for example, the stop switches 8L and 8C which are advantageous to the player by winning the navigation target winning combination as the drawing target winning combination in the internal drawing and informing the navigation. Since the operation modes of 8R and 8R are informed, it is possible to operate in a different operation mode from the informed operation mode, although it is possible to win the predetermined small winning combination included in the navigation target combination. If you cannot win the specified small winning combination, or if the specific small winning is elected and you operate it in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing within the retracted range of the specific winning combination) Although it is possible to win the prize, if the specific small winning combination cannot be won by being operated in an operation mode other than a certain operation mode, the player can win the prize. It is considered that the small role that was a Noh was awarded and the medals were paid out, and by adding the paid-out medals to the net additional number counter, while counting the number of medals in the advantageous section, the internal lottery In the situation where the player cannot win the small winning combination in a situation where the player cannot reliably win the small winning combination including a small winning combination with payout of medals,
In the internal lottery, the navigation target winning combination is won as the lottery target winning combination, and the navigation switch notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player If the winning combination cannot be won, it is preferable not to add to the net increase counter, and with such a configuration, the player cannot reliably increase the medals. For example, the net increase counter is added only when the number of medals is actually increased, which can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter to determine the bet number. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used for the setting is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0 so that the net increase number counter
When the increase / decrease number of medals is less than 0, the numerical value less than 0 is not counted but only the numerical value greater than 0 is counted. After initializing to 0, when a medal is paid out in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals is added to the net increase counter, and the medal is used for setting the bet number. In addition, by repeating the process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of medals from the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. In such a case, the counting may be performed. With such a configuration, the net increase counter is not corrected to 0 when the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0. Therefore, the process of counting the net increase by the net increase counter can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter, and is used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of medals is smaller than 0, the net increase counter value is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase counter. By controlling the net increase number counter value so that the value becomes the value, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the point when the net increase number of medals has decreased most since the start of the advantageous section. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals is most decreased after the start of the advantageous section may change depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals specified based on the net increase counter of the present embodiment may be changed depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the net number of medals by the net number-up counter from the time when the opportunity is set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, and the timing is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, which is the starting point, is counted and the advantageous section is ended when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present, which is triggered by a uniform set after the start of the advantageous interval, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous interval is calculated. As a configuration to end the, the net increase in the number of medals is started from the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, and the net increase of medals up to the present starting from the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section becomes the specified number. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is ended when the number exceeds the limit. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and the net increase of medals starting from the time other than when the normal section transitions to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net additional number counter value.

In addition, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present, which is triggered by a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a structure for terminating the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LE
When the transition to the AT state is suggested by D12a and the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, the advantageous section is set when the net increase of medals up to the present starting from is the specified number. The configuration may be such that the operation is terminated and the operation is shifted to the normal section. According to this configuration,
The starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is suggested by the section display LED 12a that the section has moved to the advantageous section, Also, since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals other than when the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, the advantageous section is calculated based on the net increase number counter value. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the ending condition of.

In addition, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present, which is triggered by a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a structure for terminating the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is suggested by the section display LED 12a that the state has shifted to the AT state, regardless of whether or not the navigation mode notifies the operation mode for increasing medals. In this case, when the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the section may shift to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation to increase the medals by the navigation notification Regardless of whether or not the mode is notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a time other than when the section display LED 12a suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the ending condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value.

In the present embodiment, the AT state management process is configured to control the end of the advantageous period when the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the specified number. However, in the AT state management process, the bet is set for each game. Instead of counting the number of medals used for setting the number, only the number of medals paid out in each game is counted, and the advantageous period is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous period exceeds a predetermined prescribed number. The configuration may be controlled to. For example, the specified number of total payout is 2865 (the payout rate of medals during 1600 games is 150%.
(2400) and the minimum number of games (16)
0 game = 2400/1 maximum payout number per game (15)) The total value of the number of medals used for setting the number of bets (480 = 160 games x 3 per game) Value obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number (15) in one game
As a result, when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended, so that the maximum net additional number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is 2400. The following can be set, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games can be set within 150%. Even if the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (specified number + 1), the advantageous section is ended, the same effect can be obtained.

[About medal payout processing]
The control contents of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the medal payout process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Se1), and a winning number / payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the prize number / payout number command setting process, for the winning combination specified based on the winning flag set and acquired in the predetermined register, the winning number that can identify the winning combination and the medal paid out with the winning of the winning combination. The command queue is set to send a command that can specify the number of sheets to the sub control unit 91. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the timer interrupt processing.

After performing the winning number / payout number command setting process in the step of Se2,
Of the payout number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning combination specified on the basis of the winning flag acquired in the step (Se3).
It is set in a predetermined area of c (Se4).

After that, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5). When it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is not 0, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and The credit counter that can specify the number of credits is referred to (Se6), and based on the credit counter value, it is determined whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit (50 in this embodiment) (Se7).

When it is determined in step Se7 that the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the credit counter value is incremented by 1 (Se8), and the medal payout process is performed (Se9). In the medal payout process, based on the credit counter value, data for displaying a value corresponding to the credit counter value is set in the output buffer of the credit indicator 11, and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The process of subtracting 1 from the remaining number, 1 is set to the number of paid-out medals, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the number of paid-out medals.
A process for adding and setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals after the addition is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12. The initial value of the number of paid-out medals is 0, and the number of paid-out medals is initialized at the end of one game.

After the medal payout process is performed in step Se9, the credit payout interval waiting process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in the present embodiment, a time during which the player or the like can visually recognize changes in the display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, for example, one medal It waits for about 0.16 seconds for each payout, and when the waiting time elapses, the credit payout interval waiting process ends. By performing the credit payout interval waiting process, the timer interrupt process is performed during a predetermined waiting time, and the display mode of the credit display unit 11 and the game auxiliary display unit 12 corresponds to the data set in each output buffer. It will be updated to the display mode. Further, the credit counter value updated by the medal payout process and the number of paid-out medals are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time, and the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display are displayed. A player or the like can visually recognize the change in the display content of the container 12.

After performing the credit payout interval waiting process in the step of Se10, the process returns to the step of Se5 and repeats the processes of the steps of Se5 to Se10 until the remaining number set in the RAM 41c becomes zero. Then, in step Se5, the remaining number is 0
If it is determined that, the medal payout process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

If it is determined in step Se7 that the credit has reached the upper limit based on the credit counter, the hopper payout process is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven, and each time the payout sensor of the hopper unit 35 detects the payout of one medal, the remaining number set in the RAM 41c is decremented by 1, and the payout is completed. After adding 1 to the number of medals, the process of setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals after the addition to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 is repeated until the remaining number becomes 0. . As a result, every time a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 35, the display of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. Then, when the remaining number becomes 0, the hopper motor is stopped and the hopper payout process is ended. After performing the hopper payout process, the medal payout process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is won and there is a vacant credit, the number of medals to be paid out in association with the winning of the small winning combination is added to the credit within a range up to the upper limit of the credit. When the credit is full, the number of medals that cannot be added to the credit is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout opening 9.

Also, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination occurs and the medal is paid out to the credit, the medal payout process is performed every time one medal is added to the credit, and the number of paid out medals is displayed. After setting the data for making it to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, the timer interrupt process is performed, and is set to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. The display of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated based on the data, and the control for maintaining the display on the game auxiliary display 12 in the updated state until the predetermined waiting time elapses is performed by the number of medals paid out to the credits. Repeat. As a result, when a small prize is won and the medals are paid out to the credits, the number of medals paid out is sequentially displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 over a predetermined time (the number of medals paid out to the credits × waiting time). Will be updated.

Also, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination occurs and the medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed and a predetermined time period corresponding to the number of paid out medals (for example, 100 ms per medal) The hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven over, and every time the payout sensor detects the payout of one medal, the data for displaying the number of paid-out medals is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12. To do. Then, the timer interrupt process is performed during the time corresponding to the number of paid-out medals, so that the display of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is updated based on the data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12. This means that the game auxiliary display 12 will take time depending on the number of medals paid out.
The display of the number of paid out medals is sequentially updated.

[About re-game operation processing]
The control content of the re-game operation time process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the re-game operation process, first, the winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and it is determined whether or not the re-gaming combination is won based on the winning flag. The determination is made (Sf2).

When it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-play combination has won, a re-play operation flag that can specify that the re-play is to be activated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf3), and the re-play is used. A medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the replay medal counter setting process, the specified number of bets in the game is specified, and the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c displays the specified number of bets in the game as a replay medal. The value of minutes (3 in this embodiment) is set.

After performing the replay medal counter setting process in the step Sf4, the lighting mode of the LED 20 during replay is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and the interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sf).
6). By performing the interrupt once waiting process in the step Sf6, the timer interrupt process is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the LED 20 during the replay is controlled to the lighting state.

After performing the interrupt once waiting process in the step Sf6, the re-game operation time process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-game combination is not winning based on the winning flag, the re-game operation time process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the re-game operation process, when the re-play role is won in the game,
During replay, the LED 20 is controlled to be in a lighting state.

Further, in the re-game operation process, when the re-play role is won in the game, the re-play medal counter is set to the re-play medal, so that the re-play game is started at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medals are set as the number of bets, and the specified number of bets is set, so that it is possible to play again.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control contents of the timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The timer interrupt process is performed by the main control unit 41 at a constant time interval (about 0.56 in this embodiment).
This is a process performed every (millisecond). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to a time longer than the time that the process that repeats according to the control state makes a round in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process. At least one cycle of processing that repeats depending on the control state is completed with the timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 19, the timer interrupt processing includes the LED dynamic display processing,
Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the LED dynamic display process is executed.

In the LED dynamic display processing, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3BETLEDs 14-16, insertion request L)
(ED17, start valid LED18, wait LED19, replay LED20, etc.)
A lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of the LED is set according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as the main processing, and the control is transmitted to the lighting control circuit of the display such as various LEDs. . By performing the LED dynamic display processing, the indicators such as various LEDs are controlled to the lighting mode according to the data set in the corresponding output buffer.

In the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, although not shown in the figure, the power interruption determination processing for detecting the occurrence of the power interruption (stopping the power supply to the slot machine 1) and the main interruption when the power interruption occurs The data set in the register of the control unit 41 and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are saved as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply. A power interruption process for saving the data in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process for initializing a predetermined output port when the power interruption occurs, and data for identifying the detection status of various switches based on the detection states of the various switches are generated. processing,
Processing of updating various timers set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing of transmitting a predetermined external output signal to the outside of the slot machine 1, processing of transmitting various commands set in the command queue, progress of game Depending on the situation and the like, it includes a process of transmitting an excitation signal to the reel motor 32 of the reel unit 34 to drive and stop each reel, and various processes are executed in a predetermined order.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at start of advantageous section]
After the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the section display start condition is satisfied and the section display is started, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the section display LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, the 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to The transition of 16 display modes will be described based on FIG.

The main control unit 41 executes the above-mentioned main processing, and performs the game start waiting processing and the payout control processing, so that at the start of the game, the game auxiliary display 12, the section display LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, and the replaying LED 20. , 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

As shown in FIG. 20A, in the game start waiting process, when the credit or bet number is empty and the medal can be inserted, the insertion request LED 17 is started to light. After that, the number of bets is set by inserting a medal or operating the MAXBET switch 6, whereby lighting of the corresponding 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. Then, the start valid LED 18 is started to be turned on by setting the specified number of bets. When the replay combination is won and the replay is given in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be in a lighting state for a period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

In this state, by operating the start switch 7, the game is started and the internal lottery is performed. Then, in the payout control process, the condition display start condition is satisfied and the flag during the advantageous period is set, so that the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the period display LED 12a, and then one interrupt is generated. By performing the waiting process, the section display LED 12a
Lights up.

Then, after the interrupt once waiting process is performed, the navigation for displaying the navigation number that suggests the operation mode according to the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery by the instruction setting process in the payout control process. The display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. After that, timer interrupt processing is performed, so that each segment of the game auxiliary display device 12 corresponding to the navigation number (3 in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, the first, third, and fourth left display devices 12L). , 6 and 7 segments and the fourth segment of the right display 12R) are started to light. That is, after the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started, the lighting of each segment of the game auxiliary display device 12 indicating the navigation number is started.

Then, after the payout control process is finished, the reel control process is performed, and after the wait has passed, that is, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2
The rotation of C and 2R will be started.

Further, in the instruction setting process during the payout control process, the main control unit 41 issues a command capable of specifying the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification when performing the navigation notification.
It is controlled so that it is transmitted to 1. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 has the main control unit 4
If it is specified that navigation notification is to be performed on the main control unit 41 side at the start of the game based on the command received from 1, the control of the navigation effect is executed and suggested by the navigation notification. The liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a navigation image indicating the operation mode. Also,
When it is specified on the main control unit 41 side that the lighting of the section display LED 12a has started, the sub control section 91 determines that the section display is started, that is, that the AT state is determined to be controlled. The AT confirmation notification for notifying is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Main control unit 41
Since the instruction setting process on the side is performed after the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on, the navigation effect by the sub-control unit 91 is performed after the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on.

In this way, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 12a to start lighting when the section display start condition is satisfied in the payout control process performed at the start of the game, so that the section display start condition is satisfied. At the start of the played game, the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on to start section display for notifying that the advantageous section is controlled.

Further, in the payout control process, the main control unit 41 controls the game auxiliary display 12 to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting the lighting of the section display LED 12a. By the time when the navigation notification is started in
The lighting of 2a is started to notify that the advantageous section has started.

Further, in the payout control process, the main control unit 41 performs a reel control process after controlling to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12, and then the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.
Since the rotation of the game is controlled, after the game is started according to the operation of the start switch 7,
By the time the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed, navigation notification is started on the game auxiliary display device 12.

In the present embodiment, in the payout control process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, the interrupt once waiting process is performed to display the section display LED1.
2a is started to be turned on, and then the instruction setting process is performed to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display. However, in the payout control process, after the turning on of the section display LED 12a is started, It is also possible to perform a delay process in which the process is intentionally delayed for a predetermined period, and when the predetermined period elapses, an instruction setting process is performed to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the sub-control unit 91 to perform the AT confirmation notification for notifying that the AT control has been confirmed within the predetermined period in which the delay process is being performed. After the AT confirmation notification is made, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started.

In the present embodiment, the main control section 41 has a configuration in which, in the payout control process, after the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on, the instruction setting process is performed and the navigation notification is started. After the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on in the control process, the instruction setting process is performed in the reel control process to start the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R,
It may be configured to control so as to start the navigation notification. With such a configuration, at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied, after the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on,
When a predetermined period of weight, that is, a predetermined period from the start of the previous game, has passed, navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12 is started. In addition, at the start of the game where the section display start condition is satisfied, if a predetermined period of weight has passed,
Almost at the same time when the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate, and the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control the start of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12 after starting the lighting of the section display LED 12a in the payout control process, and start the section display. Although the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on at the start of the game in which the condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 causes the game auxiliary display 12 to start the navigation notification in the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied. After that, at a predetermined timing until the game is finished (for example, when the third stop operation is finished, when the payout of medals is finished, when the replay game is finished, etc.), the section display LED 12a is displayed. It may be configured to start lighting.

In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to perform the AT confirmation notification when the section display LED 12a is turned on on the main control unit 41 side. In the game in which the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started on the AT side, at the timing before the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side, the AT
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a confirmation notification is given. In addition, the sub control unit 91 specifies that it is determined that the section display will be started thereafter by winning the AT lottery after shifting to the advantageous section based on the command received from the main control unit 41. From the time when the section display start condition is satisfied on the main controller 41 side, that is, A
The AT confirmation notification may be performed at a timing before the T state is started.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the section display LED 12a at the start of the game in which the navigation notification is started. However, the navigation notification is given after it is decided to shift to the AT state. The configuration may be such that the section display LED 12a is turned on before the game to be started. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 may also be configured to perform the AT confirmation notification at the timing when the main control unit 41 starts turning on the section display LED 12a after it is determined that the sub-control unit 91 should shift to the AT state.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting of the section display LED 12a and then start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12, but the main control unit 41, for example, pays out control. In the process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, the interrupt once waiting process is not performed, and then the instruction setting process is performed by the time the timer interrupt process is performed, Navi display data for navigation notifications is a game auxiliary display 12
20 (b), the configuration that can be set in the output buffer of
When the section display start condition is satisfied, the lighting of the section display LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12 may be simultaneously started. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting of the section display LED 12a to notify that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous section by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the end of the advantageous section]
At the end of the advantageous section, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the section display LED 12a, the demand LE
The transition of the display mode of the D17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

When the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won by internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the symbol combination of the small winning combination is on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. In the case of stopping, the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 21A, after the game is started in the advantageous section and the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, reel control processing is performed, and when at least one reel is rotationally controlled, the game is played. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right display 12R), the closing request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be off. On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state. still,
When the replay combination is won and the replay is given in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be in a lighting state for a period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown).

Then, after the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all reels, the AT state is set. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on condition that the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Further, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and a predetermined number (for example, 9) of medals are paid out when the winning of the small winning combination occurs. , The number of paid out medals is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated so as to be counted up to the final value indicating the predetermined number of coins corresponding to the winning small winning combination. Before the final value of the number of paid-out medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the waiting time when paying out medals to the credit or the predetermined time when paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is set. It will cost.

Then, when the payout of the predetermined number of medals corresponding to the winning small win is completed, the medal payout process is ended, and the process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a is performed in the main process. . In this process, the state control data (light-out) is set in the output buffer of the zone display LED 12a based on that the advantageous period flag is cleared in the AT state management process described above, and then the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, the section display LED 12a is turned off.

After that, by performing the game end time setting process, the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is taken in so as to take the medals inside. After the LED is set to the ON state, the closing request LED
17 is set to ON. After that, the timer interrupt process is performed, and the closing request LED
Lighting of 17 is started. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reel 2L,
In the case of stopping to 2C and 2R, after the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the reel control process is ended. The final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination by the medal payout process is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12, and then the section display LED 12 is displayed by the main process.
State control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of a, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Further, after that, the game start waiting process starts lighting of the insertion request LED 17.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is elected in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reels 2L, 2C,
In the case of stopping at 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is ended,
After that, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting processing which is performed thereafter. In other words, during the period after the reels are stopped in the game until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid, the zone display LED 12a informs that the advantageous zone has ended.

Next, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the winning symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2
Regarding the case of stopping at L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 21B, after the game is started in the advantageous section and the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, reel control processing is performed, and when at least one reel is rotationally controlled, the game is played. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right display 12R), the closing request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be off. On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state.

Then, after the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all reels, the AT state is set. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on condition that the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Further, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the small winning combination won in the internal lottery is missed, and the winning associated with the payout of medals does not occur, so the medal payout control and the control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display unit 12 are not performed. Will be finished. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is maintained in the off state.

After the medal payout process is completed, in the main process, the state control data (extinguished) is set in the output buffer of the zone display LED 12a based on the fact that the flag in the advantageous zone is cleared by the AT state management process. Then, the timer interrupt process is performed, and the section display LED 12a is turned off.

After that, by performing the game end time setting process, the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state so that the medals are taken in by the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process on condition that there is an empty bet number or credits. After that, the closing request LED 17 is set to ON, and the closing request LED 17 is turned on. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the winning symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L. 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, thereby ending the reel control process. After that, the control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is not performed by the medal payout process, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing, and the section display LED 12a is displayed. It is turned off. This allows
The section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. After that, the turning on of the insertion request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, the winning symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2
In the case of stopping at L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and then the reel control process is ended. After that, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main process, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting processing which is performed thereafter. In other words, during the period after the reels are stopped in the game until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid, the zone display LED 12a informs that the advantageous zone has ended.

Further, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, the winning symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2
In the case of stopping at L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the section display LED 12a is executed by the main process without performing the control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 by the medal payout process. The state control data (light-out) is set in the output buffer of, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery, and the case shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the reels stop on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning of the small winning combination by the medal payout process is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 after the reel control process is finished. After that, the section display LE is executed by the main processing.
State control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of D12a, and the section display LED 12a
Is turned off. That is, the timing at which the section display LED 12a is turned off differs depending on whether the small winning combination missing symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the small winning symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. .

It should be noted that, even when the symbol combination of the small winning combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or when the symbol combination of the small winning combination stops on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the section display LE is executed by the main processing
The section display LE is set by setting the state control data (light off) in the output buffer of D12a.
The D12a is turned off, and the processing timing for turning off the section display LED 12a is common. However, the small symbol missing combination is reel 2L, 2C, 2
When the game is stopped at R, after the reel control process is finished, the payout number of medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 1
The control for displaying on 2 is not performed, but the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main process, while the symbol combination of the small win is the reel 2
When stopped to L, 2C, 2R, the reel control process is ended, and further, after the control for displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display device 12 is performed, the output buffer of the section display LED 12a is executed by the main process. The state control data (light-out) is set to, and the time interval from the end of the reel control process to the turning off of the section display LED 12a is different, and the time when the section display LED 12a is turned off. The target timing is different.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, in the internal lottery, for example, when a lottery target combination including the re-playing combinations A and B is won as a winning combination and the advantageous section is changed to the normal section. ,
In the case where the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the re-gaming combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section is finished will be described with reference to FIG. . In addition, the re-game combination A, B is a re-game combination of a configuration in which the symbol combination forming the combination is different for at least one reel. In addition, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in the first operation order, the configuration symbol of the re-game combination A reel 2L
2C, 2R is preferentially stopped, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the second operation order other than the first operation mode, so that the replay game B configuration symbol is the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The reel stop control is performed so that the reels are preferentially stopped.

As shown in FIG. 22, the game is started in the advantageous section, and the re-playing combination A is performed in the internal lottery.
After the lottery target combination including B and B is won, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotationally controlled, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the 8th segment of the right display 12R), the insertion request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, and the wait state. The LED 19 and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be in the off state.
On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state.

Then, after the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all reels, the AT state is set. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on condition that the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Further, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, control for paying out medals and control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 are performed. Is ended without being performed. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the re-game operation time process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the re-play medal counter, and the replaying LED 20 is set to ON,
Lighting of the LED 20 is started during replay.

After that, in the main process, the state control data (light-out) is set in the output buffer of the period display LED 12a based on the flag during the advantageous period being cleared by the AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. As a result, the section display LED 12a is turned off.

After that, by performing the game end time setting process, the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the bet number up to the specified number is set one by one based on the fact that the re-play medal counter is set to 1 or more, and the 1 to 3 bet LEDs 14 are set.
To 16 are sequentially set to the ON state, and lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. Thereafter, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is taken in to take the medals inside. Is set to the ON state, then the input request L
ED17 is set to ON. After that, the timer interrupt process is performed, and the submission request L
Lighting of the ED 17 is started.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when a lottery target combination including re-playing combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished, and all the reels 2L, 2C. By stopping the rotation of 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the re-game operation time process is performed and the LED 20 during the replay is started to be lit. The state control data (light off) is set, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Furthermore, after that, from the game start waiting processing 1 to 3 BETLED14
The lighting of the input request LED 17 is started after the lighting of ~ 16 is sequentially started.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, a lottery target combination including re-playing combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the re-play When the symbol combination of the combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the replay LED 20 is started to be lit by the re-game operation process. After that, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. That is, even when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and when the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the interval display LED 12a is turned off. Is common.

[Transition of control state regarding AT]
The control state (ball-out state) regarding the AT controlled by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 23, the main control unit 41 can control the AT-related control states into a non-AT state, a precursory state, an AT state, and additional states A to C. Regardless of whether the game state is controlled to non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB), when the game section is controlled to the normal section, only the non-AT state is set. Control. Further, even when the game state is controlled to any of the special state (BB general, RB) during non-internal and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, only the non-AT state is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled inside and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, the non-AT state, the precursor state, the AT state, or the additional state A to C is controlled.

The non-AT state is a state in which AT control is not performed and navigation notification is not performed.
In the non-AT state, regardless of whether the game section is controlled to be the normal section or the advantageous section, even if the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is not given. Since the navigation information is not issued, the payout rate of medals does not exceed 100% in the non-AT state.

Also, in the non-AT state, the AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the pushing order in the present embodiment, provided that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled to the inside When the small winning combinations 1 to 6, the specific winning combination 1, the specific winning combination 2, and the re-game winning combination 1) are won, the AT lottery is performed. In the AT lottery, whether or not to shift to the AT state and the A
The number of games to be controlled to the T state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the AT game number) is determined, and by winning the AT lottery, it is determined that the AT state is to be entered and a predetermined number. The number of AT games will be given.

An AT game number counter for counting the number of remaining AT games is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 sets the AT game number counter when the non-AT state is started. The AT game number counter value is initialized to 0. When the AT lottery is won, the winning AT game number is added to the AT game number counter. afterwards,
The AT state is controlled on condition that the AT game number counter value is 1 or more.

Further, in the non-AT state, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the gaming state is not controlled to be inside, that is, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, If the state is controlled to non-internal, or if the game section is controlled to a normal section and the game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the internal lottery Even if the winning combination for the AT lottery is won, the AT lottery is not performed and the number of AT games is not given. As a result, when the vehicle is controlled in the normal section or in the non-internal control, the AT state is not entered, and the navigation notification is not issued, so that the medal payout rate is 100%. It does not exceed%.

Further, the non-AT state is ended at the end of the game in which the AT lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the state is shifted to the omen state over a predetermined number of games. The number of games controlled in the precursory state is selected and determined by the precursory state lottery from the number of games within a predetermined range (5 to 20 games) at the transition to the precursory state. A sign state counter for counting the number of remaining games in the sign state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41.
When the non-AT state is started, the omen state counter value is initialized to 0, and when the omen state lottery is performed, the number of games in the omen state determined by the omen state lottery is added to the omen state counter. To do.

The omen state is a state controlled by the AT lottery target winning combination being won in the internal lottery in the non-AT state, and is a state in which navigation notification can be performed. In the omen state, when the navigation target winning combination (in this embodiment, the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the navigation notification with a predetermined probability. By winning the navigation lottery, the navigation notification is controlled. In the navigation lottery in the omen state, it is determined that the navigator is informed so that the medal payout rate (payout number / bet number) in the omen state is about 100%. ing. Thus, in the warning state, when the navigation notification is performed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification.
Is operated, it is possible to increase the number of medals to be increased among the winning combinations included in the selected push order small combination, and the payout rate of medals can be set to about 100%. There is.

In this embodiment, in the omen state, the payout rate of medals is about 100% when the target winning combination for navigation is won.
The navigation notification is given at a frequency of, and the number of medals possessed by the player is controlled at the end of the AT state (low probability) by being controlled to the AT state (low accurate). There is almost no increase or decrease from the start time, and the number of medals at the start time is maintained, but by controlling to the omen state, the number of medals possessed by the player starts at the end of the omen state It may be configured to increase or decrease from the time point. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the increase / decrease rate of medals in the omen state is within a range from the increase / decrease rate in the non-AT state to the increase / decrease rate in the AT state.

In the omen state, after the above-mentioned game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display is controlled and the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on in the game in which the navigation is first notified. Then, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state until the advantageous section is ended.

In each game in the precursory state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the aforementioned precursory state counter value is zero. If the counter value is not 0, the precursory state counter value is decremented by 1 by the end of the game, and the precursory state is maintained in the next game. On the other hand, when the precursory state counter value is 0, the AT game number counter is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of the AT game numbers being given is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the remaining number of AT games is 1 or more, control is performed to end the precursory state and shift to the AT state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remaining AT games is not 1 or more, the control is terminated so as to end the precursory state and shift to the non-AT state.

The AT state is a state in which the number of AT games given is consumed and controlled, the AT can be controlled, and the navigation notification can be performed. In the AT state, when the navigation target winning combination (in the present embodiment, the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the navigation lottery for deciding whether or not to perform the navigation notification is performed as in the omen state. When the navigation is performed and the player wins the navigation lottery, the navigation notification is controlled. In the navigation lottery in the AT state, it is always decided that the player will win and the navigation notification will be given at a frequency of 100% at the time of winning the navigation target winning combination. As a result, in the AT state, the navigation notification is always performed when the winning combination for the navigation is won. Then, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, the winning combination included in the winning push-order small winning combination, which increases the number of medals, is won. Thus, the payout rate of medals can be set to a predetermined payout rate of more than 100% (for example, about 200% to about 260% (a net increase of 3 to 5 per game)).

In each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 sets the above-mentioned AT game number counter value to 1
After the subtraction, it is determined whether the AT game number counter value is 0 or not. And the A
When the T game number counter value is not 0, control is performed to maintain the AT state. on the other hand,
When the AT game number counter value is 0, the AT state is terminated at the end of the game, and control is performed to shift to the non-AT state.

In addition, in the AT state, an internal lottery is added to a target lottery (in the present embodiment, the push order small wins 1 to 1).
When a specific small winning combination 1, a specific small winning combination 2, and a re-playing winning combination 1) are won, an additional lottery is performed. In the additional lottery, whether or not the number of AT games is to be added, and the AT to be added when the addition is made
Determine the number of games. Then, by winning the additional lottery, the number of winning AT games is added to the AT game number counter. The main control unit 41 starts the ED control described later (the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first predetermined value and the number of medals net increase in the advantageous zone is the second).
In a game after it is determined that at least one of exceeding a predetermined value is established, the additional lottery is controlled. When the start condition of the ED control is fixed, the AT state is continued until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, regardless of the remaining number of AT games. Since the section is ended, unnecessary control, for example, control of additional lottery, can be reduced by controlling not to perform additional lottery in the game after the start condition of the ED control is satisfied.

In addition, the AT state and the omen state are the conditions for ending the advantageous zone described above (at least one of the number of advantageous zone games reaching the upper limit number of games and the number of medals net increase exceeding the prescribed number). When it is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and the non-AT state is entered.

In addition, in the AT state, an internal lottery-added state lottery target winning combination (in the present embodiment, the specific winning combination 1
When the specific small win 2) is won, an additional state lottery is performed to determine whether to control any of the additional states A to C described later. In the addition state lottery, the probability that the control to the addition state B is determined is set higher than the probability that the control to the addition state A is determined, and the control to the addition state C is determined. The probability of being set is set to be higher than the probability of determining to control the additional state B. In addition, in the addition state lottery, when the specific small win 2 of the additional state lottery target winning combinations is won by the internal lottery, the specific small winning combination 1 is won by the internal lottery. With a higher probability than if it is done,
It is decided to control to any of the additional states A to C (see FIG. 30).
. The main control unit 41 starts the ED control described below (at least one of the number of advantageous zone games reaching the first predetermined value and the number of medal net additions in the advantageous zone exceeding the second predetermined value). In the game after it is confirmed that is established, the addition state lottery is controlled not to be performed. When the start condition of the ED control is fixed, the AT state is continued until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, which is advantageous regardless of the remaining number of AT games. Since the section is terminated, unnecessary control, for example, control of additional state, control of additional lottery, etc. can be reduced by controlling not to perform additional state lottery in the game after the start condition of ED control is satisfied. .

Then, when it is determined that the additional control is performed in any of the additional states A to C by winning the additional state lottery, the main control unit 41 determines a predetermined number of games (in the present embodiment, an AT game in the game). If the number counter value is 3 or more, and if the AT game number counter value is less than 3 in the game, the additional state A to C is applicable after the elapse of 0 game).
Control to shift to.

The additional states A to C are states in which the additional lottery is performed with a higher probability than the AT state, and are controlled over a predetermined number of games that are predetermined according to each additional state. In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, an additional state game number counter for counting the number of remaining games in the additional state is set. When the main control unit 41 wins in the additional state lottery, A predetermined number of games (three games in the additional state A and 10 games in the additional states B and C) predetermined according to the selected additional state is set in the additional state game number counter. Then, the addition state game number counter is decremented by 1 at the start of each game controlled to the addition state, and the addition state game number counter value is continuously controlled to the addition state on condition that the added state game number counter value is 1 or more. On the other hand, when the addition state game number counter value becomes 0, the addition state is terminated and the AT state is controlled.

In addition, in the addition states A to C, an addition lottery is performed to determine the number of AT games to be added at the start of the addition state, and the number of winning AT games is added to the AT game number counter. In the add-on lottery at the start of the add-on state, it is determined that the AT game number of a predetermined number of games (at least one game in this embodiment) or more is added, and the add-on states A to C are added. By being controlled, the number of AT games is always added. In addition, in the addition states A to C, when the addition target lottery (in this embodiment, the pushing order small wins 1 to 6, the specific small win 1, the specific small win 2 and the re-gaming win 1) is won in the internal lottery. In addition, we carry out lottery,
Whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined, and when adding, the number of AT games to be added is determined. Then, by winning the additional lottery, the number of winning AT games is added to the AT game number counter. In the add-on lottery that is performed when the winning combination of the add-on lottery is won in the add-on states A to C, the probability that the AT game number is added is determined and the AT game number to be added is the add-on lottery target in the AT state. It is becoming higher than the additional lottery that is performed when the winning role is won.

In addition, in the add-on lottery performed at the start of the add-on states A to C and at the time of winning the add-on lottery target combination, the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in each of the add-on states A to C is given within a predetermined range. The number of AT games to be played is decided. The expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state B is set higher than the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state C, and the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state A is expected. The value is set higher than the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state B (see FIG. 30).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling a plurality of types of states including the non-AT state and the AT state, which is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state, as the control state regarding the AT. Yes, it is possible to control the AT state by digesting the given AT game number.

In this embodiment, the number of AT games is given by AT lottery, and the number of AT games given is consumed to control the AT state. Alternatively, the number of medals to be paid out or the number of medals to be added may be added by AT lottery, and these may be consumed to control the AT state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment changes the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the number of medals increases in the internal lottery. It is possible to perform a navigation notification that can be notified, and in the control of the navigation notification, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order in the AT state, and in the AT state, the frequency at which the correct pressing order is notified by the navigation notification than in the non-AT state. This is a configuration that is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state due to the increase in the.

Further, the additional states include additional states A to C having different numbers of AT games to be added, and by being controlled to the additional states A to C, according to the expected value predetermined for each additional state. AT games can be added.

[About ending control]
The ending control performed by the main controller 41 will be described.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the first predetermined value (the present embodiment) before the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games (1,500 games in the present embodiment) while controlling the AT state. 1400 games) or the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment) before exceeding the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When at least one of the conditions is satisfied, thereafter, regardless of the number of AT games, the AT state is continued until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous period is satisfied, and the advantageous period is ended. Ending control (ED
Control, and the ending state (ED state: end condition 1 or end condition 2 of the advantageous section)
The state is controlled to the AT state until any of the above is established). Hereinafter, a state in which the AT state is controlled and the ending control is performed is referred to as an AT state (ED), and a state in which the AT state is controlled and the ending control is not performed is referred to as an AT state (normal). May be called.

Specifically, the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section game number is the first predetermined value (this embodiment) based on the advantageous section game number counter value and the net increase number counter value in each game controlled to the AT state. 1400 games), it is determined whether the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment), and the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined value. It is determined that at least one of the fact that (in this embodiment, 1400 games) has been reached and that the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2188) has been established. ED transition flag indicating that the transition to the ED state is made in the RAM
It is set in a predetermined area of 41c.

Then, in the subsequent games, the ED transition flag is set to the RAM 41c at the start of the game.
Refer to whether the ED transition flag is set, based on whether the ED transition flag is set, ED control is performed regardless of the remaining number of AT games to shift to the ED state,
Control to continue the AT state. The ED transition flag is included in the advantageous zone data described above and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized by the advantageous zone data initialization process. The ED transition flag is set by the advantageous zone data initialization process. By the initialization, the ED control is terminated and the ED state is terminated together with the termination of the advantageous section and the AT state. As a result, the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), and the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section has exceeded the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). From the next game in which at least one of the above is established, the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), and the number of medals net increase in the advantageous zone is the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). The ED control is performed based on that the ED transition flag is set until the game in which at least one of the conditions (the end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, and the AT state is set. Will be continuously controlled.

As described above, in the ending control, in the AT state, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the medal net increase in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (the present implementation). In the example, on the condition that at least one of 2188) is satisfied, in the game after the condition is satisfied, the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is irrespective of the number of AT games. The ED control is performed to shift to the ED state and the AT state is continued for a period until the condition is established.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first predetermined value or the number of medals net increase in the advantageous zone becomes the second predetermined value during the control to the AT state. By exceeding this, the ending control is performed, and regardless of the number of AT games, it is configured to continuously control the AT state until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value or the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value while the AT state is controlled, the advantageous section is then The number of AT games required to satisfy the end condition 1 (the number of games of the difference between the current advantageous section game number and the upper limit game number) and the number of games required to satisfy the advantageous section end condition 2 (current net increase (The number of games corresponding to the difference between the number and the specified number) is added to the AT game number counter and the AT state control is continued based on the AT game number counter, whereby the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is set. The configuration may be such that the AT state is continuously controlled until it is established.

[Ending related control]
The ending related control performed by the main control unit 41 will be described.

As a control related to the above-mentioned ED control, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment adds the AT game number given by winning the additional lottery in the AT state and the additional state, and adds AT.
When the game number counter is updated, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the ED control start condition is satisfied, based on the AT game number counter value, the advantageous period game number counter value, and the net additional number counter value. When it is determined that the ED control start condition is satisfied,
After the AT game number correction process 1 for correcting the AT game number counter value is performed, a command to the effect that the AT game number correction process 1 is performed and a command capable of specifying the corrected AT game number counter value is issued to the sub control unit 91. It is possible to perform the ED-related control 1 that controls the transmission to the other side.

Specifically, in the ED related control 1, when the AT game number counter is updated by adding the AT game numbers given by winning the additional lottery, the updated AT game number counter value and the advantageous section game The number counter value is added to calculate an additional value 1 (scheduled value of the number of advantageous zone games), and the additional value 1 is the first predetermined value (140 in the present embodiment) that is the start condition of the above-mentioned ED control.
(0 game) or more, that is, whether the ED control start condition is satisfied by maintaining the AT state based on the AT game number counter is determined. Then, the addition value 1 is the first
If it is determined that the ED control start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the ED control start condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the addition value 1 is not the first predetermined value or more, the ED control start is performed. It is determined that the condition is not established.

In addition, when the AT game number counter is updated by adding the AT game numbers given by winning the additional lottery, the average of the updated AT game number counter value and the net increase number per game in the AT state After multiplying the value with the value to calculate a multiplication value (a predicted value of the net increase in number according to the number of AT games), the multiplication value and the net increase number counter value are added to obtain an added value 2 (a predicted value of the net increase in the advantageous section). ) Is calculated, and whether the added value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 sheets in this embodiment) which is the start condition of the above-mentioned ED control, that is, the AT state based on the AT game number counter. Is continued to determine whether or not the ED control start condition is satisfied.
Then, when it is determined that the addition value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value, it is determined that the start condition of the ED control is established, and the addition value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value. If it is determined that the ED control start condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the ED control start condition is not satisfied.

Then, in the ED-related control 1, it is determined that the start condition of the ED control is satisfied based on the above-described additional value 1 (planned value of the number of advantageous section games) or the additional value 2 (predicted value of the net number increase of the advantageous section). When it is determined that the AT game number correction process 1 is performed.

In the AT game number correction process 1, when it is determined that the start condition of the ED control is determined to be established based on the addition value 1 as a trigger, if the AT game number correction process is performed, The subtraction value 1 (the number of remaining games until the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games) is calculated by subtracting the advantageous section game number counter value from the upper limit number of advantageous section games, and the AT game number counter value is calculated. By setting the subtraction value 1 to, the AT game number counter value is corrected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start condition of the ED control is established based on the added value 2 and the AT game number correction process is being performed, the medal of the advantageous section described above is executed. The subtraction value 2 (
After calculating the remaining net increase in the advantageous section until the net increase exceeds the specified number, divide the subtraction value 2 by the average value of the net increase per game in the AT state (the net increase in the advantageous section). The predicted value of the number of remaining games until the number exceeds the specified number (rounded up to the decimal point) is calculated, and the AT game number counter value is corrected by setting the division value to the AT game number counter value.

Then, in the ED-related control 1, after the AT game number correction processing 1 is performed to correct the AT game number counter value, a command that can specify the corrected AT game number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. After that, the main control unit 41 updates the AT game number counter by subtracting 1 for each game, and then transmits to the sub control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the updated AT game number counter value. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 uses the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, to describe the AT state effect (described later).
Control is performed so that the number of AT games is displayed in ED confirmation). As a result, the sub control unit 9
In No. 1, the AT game number can be displayed so as to match the remaining advantageous section game number, that is, the remaining AT game number in the AT state effect (ED confirmation).

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the AT game number correction process 1 in the ED-related control 1 to determine that the start condition of the ED control is satisfied, that is, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. When is determined, the AT game number counter value is corrected to the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. As a result, when the ED control start condition is satisfied, the AT game number counter value is the initial value of the ED state (the number of games from the start of the ED control to the end condition of the advantageous section (in the present embodiment, 100 games)). Further, the advantageous section is configured to be ended in a game in which the AT game number counter value is 0, that is, a game in which all the assigned AT game numbers have been exhausted and no AT game number remains.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 uses the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, in the AT state effect (ED confirmation) described later.
The number of games is displayed and the number of remaining advantageous section games in the ED effect is displayed. As a result, the sub-control unit 91 can display the number of AT games and the number of remaining advantageous section games so as to match the number of remaining advantageous section games in the AT state effect (ED confirmation) and the ED effect. .

Further, the main control unit 41, as the ED-related control 2 related to the above-mentioned ED control, based on the advantageous section game number counter value and the net increase number counter value in each game in the AT state and not performing the ED control. In the game in which it is determined whether or not the ED control start condition is satisfied, and in the game in which it is determined that the ED control start condition is satisfied, the AT game number counter value is the initial value of the ED state (from the start of the ED control to the advantageous section. The number of games until the end condition is satisfied (in this embodiment,
100 games)). When it is determined that the AT game number counter value is not the initial value, the AT game number correction process 2 is performed to set the initial value in the ED state to the AT game number counter value and then correct the AT game number. It is possible to perform control so as to transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command capable of specifying that the number correction process 2 has been performed and the corrected AT game number counter value.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the AT game number correction process 2 in the ED-related control 2 so that the start condition of the ED control is satisfied, that is, the end condition of the advantageous section is determined to be satisfied. In addition, the AT game number counter value is corrected to the initial value of the ED state, that is, the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. As a result, the AT game number counter value becomes 0 when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied,
The advantageous section is set to be ended in a game in which all of the assigned AT games have been exhausted and no AT games remain.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 performs control so as to display the number of remaining advantageous section games in the ED effect described later using the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. As a result, the sub-control unit 91 can display the number of remaining advantageous section games so as to match the number of remaining advantageous section games in the ED effect.

[Regarding the control flow of the control state relating to the AT by the main control unit and the control flow of the production related to the AT performed by the sub control unit]
The flow of control of the control state regarding the AT by the main control unit and the flow of control of the production related to the AT by the sub control unit will be described based on FIGS. 24 to 27.

First, the main control unit and the sub-control unit in the case where the condition for performing the ED control is not satisfied while the AT state (normal) is being controlled and the AT state (normal) is ended without the ED control being performed. The control flow (see FIG. 24) and the control flow of the main control unit and the sub control unit when the ED control condition is satisfied in the AT state (normal) and the ED control is performed (see FIG. 25) will be described. To do.

As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, when the main control unit 41 controls in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, the AT lottery target wins in the internal lottery Draw lots. Then, by determining in the AT lottery that it is won and shifting to the AT state (normal), the AT game number (winning value) awarded and awarded in the AT lottery is displayed in the AT game number counter. Set. After that, it shifts to the omen state, and when a predetermined number of games have passed, A
Transition to T state (normal). Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts to the precursory state, the main control unit 41 transmits a command capable of specifying the shift to the precursory state to the sub-control unit 91, and the AT
When shifting to the state (normal), a command that can specify that the AT state (normal) is to be transmitted is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the sub control unit 91 shifts to the omen state based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 sets the effect mode to the non-AT state on the main control unit 41 side. The normal effect mainly performed while being controlled (see, for example, FIG. 39D) is shifted to the predictive effect (not shown) performed when being controlled to the predictive state. Further, when it is specified that the AT state (normal) is to be entered based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the main control unit 41 side controls the presentation mode from the precursor effect to the AT state (normal). The state is shifted to the AT state effect (normal) (for example, refer to FIG. 28 (a)) which is performed during the time. As will be described later, in the AT state effect (normal), the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the remaining number of AT games is suggested.

After shifting to the AT state (normal), the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the AT game number counter value at the start of each game, and when the AT game number counter value becomes 0, the game concerned At the end of, the AT state (normal) is controlled so as to be shifted to the non-AT state, while when the AT game number counter value is 1 or more, the AT state is controlled so as to be continued in the next game. . If the game is controlled to the AT state, A
A command that can specify the remaining number of AT games specified based on the T game number counter is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Further, in each game controlled to the advantageous section, the advantageous section game number counter is incremented by 1 at the start of the game (see FIG. 14), and the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the upper limit number of games at the end of the game. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied (see FIG. 15). Further, at the end of each game controlled in the advantageous zone, the net increase counter is updated based on the bet number and the number of medals paid out in the game, and whether or not the net increase counter value exceeds the specified number, that is, It is determined whether or not the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied (see FIG. 15). When at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the advantageous section data, thereby ending the advantageous section and the AT state. Let Further, when controlling the advantageous section, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, At the end of each game, a command that can specify the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase counter is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the remaining number of AT games is 0 based on the AT game number counter, that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, and that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. In the period until the condition is established, that is, in the period in which the control is performed in the advantageous section and the AT state is controlled, the target object to be navigated by the internal lottery (in the present embodiment, the push order small winning combination
In the game selected by 6), the navigation notification is controlled, the navigation number corresponding to the winning navigation target combination is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and the command that can specify the navigation number is sub-displayed. It is transmitted to the control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the navigation target winning combination has been won and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41.
The LCD display 5 displays the navigation image corresponding to the navigation number notified by the navigation notification.
1 to indicate the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number. In the navigation effect performed while controlling the AT state effect (normal), as will be described later, an effect mode lottery for determining in which of the first mode and the second mode the navigation effect is performed is performed. The liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a navigation image corresponding to the effect mode (first mode or second mode) determined by the effect mode lottery.

In addition, the main control unit 41, during the period in which it is controlled to the advantageous section and is controlled to the AT state, is added to the target lottery in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the push-order small wins 1 to 6, specific wins). In the game in which the small role 1, the specific small role 2, and the re-playing role 1) are won, the additional lottery is carried out. When the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games awarded and won is added to the AT game number counter. to add. Then, the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter after the winning AT game number is added and the advantageous section game number specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a first predetermined value which is a condition for performing the above-mentioned ED control. Then, when it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous zone games is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, ED control is performed to indicate that it is determined to perform the ED control and shift to the ED state. The confirmation flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the control in the AT state (normal) is continued (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous zone games is not equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the ED transition confirmation flag is not set and the AT state (normal) control is continued. (See FIG. 24).

In addition, when the additional lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 issues a command that can specify that the additional lottery has been performed and the result of the additional lottery (for example, the number of assigned AT games, etc.). Send to. When the ED transition confirmation flag is set, the ED
A command that can specify that the migration confirmation flag has been set is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 suggests the additional lottery result as will be described later. Is performed (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

As shown in FIG. 24, it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41. However, if it is not specified that the ED transition confirmation flag is set, the operation described below is performed. At the end of the game (for example, when the operation to stop the third reel is performed, when the operation request effect lottery for determining whether to execute the request effect is performed and the operation request effect lottery is won. ) Is performed, and the operation of the production switch 56 is prompted. When the effect switch 56 is operated in the state where the operation request effect is being triggered by the winning of the operation request effect lottery, the AT state effect (normal) is restarted without performing the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect described later. Also, if you do not win the operation request effect lottery, without performing the operation request effect,
After the addition effect is finished, the AT state effect (normal) is restarted.

Then, when the remaining number of the AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 becomes 3 or less in the state where the AT state effect (normal) is being performed, an end suggestion notification described later is given. 1 is performed to notify that the AT state is ended by using the AT game number display before the end of the AT state.

When the main control unit 41 determines that the remaining number of AT games is 0 based on the AT game number counter in the state of controlling the AT state (normal), the main control unit 41 finishes the AT state (normal). ) Is ended to shift to the non-AT state.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 issues an AT state result notification, which will be described later, at the end of the game when the remaining number of the AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 becomes 0. , The game result in the AT state (the number of medals paid out in the AT state, the number of games controlled in the AT state, etc.) is notified. Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the bet number of the specified number is set), the AT state result notification is ended and the normal effect is performed. To control.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when it is specified that the ED transition confirmation flag is set based on the command received from the main control unit 41, at the end of the game (for example, the third reel). When the stop operation is performed), the operation request effect is performed. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated in the state where the operation request effect is being performed, the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect described below is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed (FIG. 41 ( a) to (d)
reference). In this way, the operation request effect may be executed both when it is confirmed that the transition to the ED state is confirmed and when it is not confirmed that the transition to the ED state is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed by the operation request presentation. As will be described later, when the operation request effect is being performed, the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is not displayed.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 ends the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect by the start operation of the next game, and the main control unit 41 starts the ED control and transitions to the ED state. Over the period, an AT state effect (E
(D confirmation) is performed (see FIGS. 41D and 41E). AT state production (ED confirmed)
Then, as will be described later, an AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is performed, and an ED confirmation suggestion display indicating that the transition to the ED state is confirmed is performed.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 indicates that the navigation target combination has been won based on the command received from the main control unit 41 and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification during the period in which the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed. When specified, a navigation effect is performed. When the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed, the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode, but the navigation effect is performed in the first mode.

The main controller 41 ends the game in which it is specified that the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the first predetermined value in a state where the main control section 41 controls the AT state (normal). At the same time, an ED transition flag that can specify that the transition to the ED state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a command that can specify that the transition to the ED state can be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Then, the ED control is started on condition that the ED transition flag is set at the start of the next game of the game. When the ED control is started, the AT state (normal) shifts to the AT state (ED). At the start of each subsequent game, the ED transition flag is referred to, and the ED control is continued on condition that the ED transition flag is set.

In the ED control, the advantageous condition ending condition 1 that is satisfied when the number of advantageous period games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net number of advantageous regions specified based on the net number-of-additions counter exceed the specified number. The AT state (ED) is controlled to continue for a period until at least one of the advantageous condition end conditions 2 is satisfied. In addition, control is performed so as to perform navigation notification in the game in which the target navigation target is won in the internal lottery.

Although not particularly shown, it can be specified that the net increase in the number of advantageous zones specified based on the net increase counter is greater than the second predetermined value under the control of the AT state (normal). Similarly to the case where it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to start the ED control, and the AT state (normal) to the AT state ( ED). Then, the AT state (ED) is controlled to continue for a period until at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the game selected by the navigation target winning combination in the internal lottery. Control is performed so that navigation notification is performed.

In the ED control, a command that can specify that the ED control is being performed, the number of games remaining until the end condition 1 of the advantageous zone is satisfied, and the remaining net increase in number until the end condition 2 of the advantageous period is satisfied are set. The identifiable command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, at the end of the game in which the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the transition to the ED state is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 performs the ED start suggestion effect described below to perform the next game. This suggests that the ED control is performed and the AT state (ED) is entered. Then, by performing a start operation of the next game of the game, the ED start suggestion effect is ended, the ED effect described later is entered, and it is suggested that the AT state (ED) is being controlled.

During the ED effect, the end condition notification described later is performed, and the number of remaining games until the end condition 1 of the advantageous section specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is satisfied and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section are set. By displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 the number of remaining net increase until the condition is satisfied, it is suggested that the condition for ending the advantageous section is almost satisfied.

Further, in the state where the ED effect is being performed, the number of games until the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games based on a command received from the main control unit 41 is a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment). After it is specified that the advantageous section is ended, the end advance notification described below is performed to notify that the advantageous section and the AT state are ended for a period until the advantageous section is ended.

Although not shown in particular, in the state where the ED effect is being performed, the net additional number of sheets until the net additional number of the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is less than the predetermined number (for example, Even if it is determined that the number of games until the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games is determined to be the predetermined number of games, During the period until the end, the advance advance notification described later is performed to notify that the advantageous section and the AT state are ended.

Based on the fact that the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games and the net number-of-addition counter is under control, the main control unit 41 is in the AT state (DE) control state. At the end of the game in which it is specified that at least one of the number of net additions in the specified advantageous zone exceeds the specified number, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous zone. End AT state (ED)
Shift to the state. At the end of the game, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and a command capable of specifying that the advantageous section has ended is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines at the end of the game that the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the command received from the main control section 41 to determine that the advantageous section and the AT state have ended. , AT state result notification to be described later, the game result in the AT state (A
The number of medals paid out in the T state, the number of games controlled in the AT state, and the like) are notified. Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the bet number of the specified number is set), the AT state result notification is ended and the normal effect is performed. To control.

Further, at the end of the game in which it is specified that the advantageous section and the AT state have been finished, an intrusion prevention notification described below and a post-exit notification described later are performed, and the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, and thus the advantageous section and the AT state are satisfied. Notify that the state has ended. After that, the entanglement prevention notification is terminated on the condition that a predetermined time (three seconds or more in the present embodiment) has elapsed, and the end posterior notification is issued on the condition that a predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment) have elapsed. To end.

Next, the condition for performing the ED control is not satisfied while controlling the additional state, and E
The control flow of the main control unit and the sub-control unit when the add-on state is terminated without performing the D control (see FIG. 26), and the condition for performing the ED control in the add-on state is satisfied, and when the ED control is performed The control flow of the main control unit and the sub control unit (see FIG. 27) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 wins the additional state lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery when controlling in the advantageous section and controlling in the AT state (normal). By doing so, the additional lottery will be conducted. Then, in the additional state lottery, the additional state A to be won.
By deciding to shift to C, the predetermined number of games according to the decided addition state is
The additional state game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set, and when the predetermined number of games has passed thereafter, the selected additional state A to C is shifted. In addition, if you win in the add-on state lottery, the number of AT games won in the add-on state lottery is AT
The AT game number is added by adding it to the game number counter.

In addition, when the main control unit 41 shifts to the additional states A to C, the main control unit 41 makes a transition to the additional state, the additional states A to C to be transitioned, and the additional state lottery wins and is added A.
A command that can specify the number of T games is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the sub control unit 91 shifts to the additional state based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 generates the additional state effects A to C depending on the additional states A to C to be transitioned. Control to perform C. As will be described later, the addition state effects A to C are
These are effects with different effect modes (see FIG. 30), and the type of the added state being controlled can be specified based on the effect modes. In addition, as will be described later, in the addition state effects A to C, the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the AT state effect (normal).

After shifting to the additional states A to C, the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the additional state game number counter value at the start of each game, and when the additional state game number counter value is 1 or more, , It is controlled so that the additional state is continued in the next game. On the other hand, when the addition state game number counter value after subtracting 1 is not 1 or more, the addition state is ended at the end of the game and the state is changed to the AT state (normal). Further, in the case of controlling in the addition state, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the remaining number of addition games specified based on the addition game number counter is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. .

Further, even in the case of controlling in the addition state, as in the case of controlling in the AT state (normal), in each game, the advantageous section game number counter is incremented by 1 at the start of the game (see FIG.
4), at the end of each game controlled in the advantageous section, the net increase counter is updated based on the bet number and the payout number of medals in the game. When it is specified that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous period is satisfied based on the advantageous period game number counter value and the net number increase counter value, it is advantageous at the end of the game. The section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and the AT state.

Further, even when controlling in the addition state, as in the case of controlling in the AT state (normal), the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is specified at the start of each game. A possible command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and at the end of each game, a command capable of specifying the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase counter is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the remaining number of the added-state state games is 0 based on the added-state state game number counter, that the advantageous condition end condition 1 is satisfied, and that the advantageous period end condition 2 is satisfied. It is controlled in the period until one of
And during the period of controlling the addition state, the target object to navigate by internal lottery (in this embodiment,
In the game in which the press order small wins 1 to 6) are won, the navigation notification is controlled, and the navigation number corresponding to the winning navigation target win is notified using the game auxiliary display device 12, and the navigation number is displayed. The identifiable command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the navigation target winning combination has been won and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41.
The LCD display 5 displays the navigation image corresponding to the navigation number notified by the navigation notification.
1 to indicate the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number. In the navigation effect performed while controlling the addition state effect, similar to the navigation effect performed when controlling the AT state effect (normal), an effect mode lottery is performed and determined by the effect mode lottery. The liquid crystal display 51 is made to display the navigation image corresponding to the rendered effect mode (first mode or second mode).

Further, the main control unit 41, during the period in which it is controlled to the advantageous section and is controlled to be in the additional state, the target combination to be added to the additional lottery in the internal lottery (in the present embodiment, the push-order small wins 1 to 6, specified. In the game in which the small role 1, the specific small role 2, and the re-playing role 1) are won, the additional lottery is carried out. When the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games awarded and won is added to the AT game number counter. to add. Then, the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter after the winning AT game number is added and the advantageous section game number specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a first predetermined value which is a condition for performing the above-mentioned ED control. When it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous zone games is not equal to or larger than the first predetermined value, the ED transition confirmation flag is not set and the control in the addition state is continued (FIG. 26). reference). On the other hand, the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous section games is the first
If it is determined that the value is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the ED transition confirmation flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the addition state is ended at the end of the game, and the state is changed to the AT state (normal) (see FIG. 27). .

In addition, when the additional lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 issues a command that can specify that the additional lottery has been performed and the result of the additional lottery (for example, the number of assigned AT games, etc.). Send to. When the ED transition confirmation flag is set, the ED
A command that can specify that the migration confirmation flag has been set is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 suggests the additional lottery result as will be described later. (See FIG. 26 and FIG. 27).

As shown in FIG. 26, it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, but if it is not specified that the ED transition confirmation flag is set, the operation described later is performed. When an operation request effect lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the request effect is performed, and when the operation request effect lottery is won, at the end of the game (for example, a stop operation of the third reel is performed. When the operation request effect is performed, the operation of the effect switch 56 is prompted. When the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where the operation request effect is being triggered by the winning of the operation request effect lottery, the addition state effect is restarted without performing the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect described later.
Further, when the operation request effect lottery is not won, the addition effect is restarted after the addition effect is finished without performing the operation request effect.

Then, in the state where the addition state effect is being performed, when the remaining number of the addition state games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is 3 or less, the end suggestion notification 2 is performed. In the end suggestion notification 2, a suggestion display suggesting the remaining number of additional games (
For example, a message image such as “addition state after XX game” including a number image indicating the number of addition states games is displayed), and the fact that the addition states are ended is notified before the end of the addition states.

At the end of the game in which it is specified that the remaining number of the added-on state games is 0 based on the added-on state game number counter in the state where the main control unit 41 controls the added state,
The addition state is ended and the AT state (normal) is entered.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 issues an additional-state result notification, which will be described later, at the end of the game when the remaining number of additional-state games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is 0. The game result in the added state (AT given in the added state
The total number of games). Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated in the state where the bet number of the specified number is set), the addition state result notification is ended and the AT state (normal) 42 (a) to (d).
reference).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, when it is specified that the ED transition confirmation flag is set based on the command received from the main control unit 41, at the end of the game (for example, the third reel). When the stop operation is performed), the addition state effect is ended and the operation request effect is performed. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated in the state in which the operation request effect is being performed, the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect described below is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state is confirmed (FIG. 43 ( See a) to (d)). In this way, even when the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the addition state, as in the AT state (normal) control, the E
The operation request effect may be executed both when it is confirmed that the state is to be shifted to the D state and when it is not confirmed that the state is to be shifted to the ED state. By performing the requested performance, it is possible to suggest that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 ends the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect by the start operation of the next game (see FIGS. 43 (d) and (e)). After that, as in the case where the ED control is performed from the AT state (normal) as described above, the AT state effect is produced for the period from the start of the ED control on the main control unit 41 side to the transition to the ED state. Control to perform (ED confirmation). In this way, when it is specified that the ED transition confirmation flag is set during the addition state production, after the addition state production is ended and the operation request production is performed, the ED transition confirmation suggestion production is performed. Is performed to shift to the AT state effect (ED confirmation), and the additional state result notification is not performed.

The main control unit 41 determines that the ED state is set in the addition state, and after the addition state is ended and the AT state (normal) is set, the ED state is set in the AT state (normal) as described above. As in the case where it is confirmed that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first predetermined value, the state is shifted to the AT state (ED), and then the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games. By satisfying at least one of the end condition 1 of the advantageous section that is satisfied in 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section that is satisfied when the net number of sheets of the advantageous section specified based on the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the specified number. , The advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous section and the AT state are controlled to end.

Although not shown in the drawings, after the addition state is finished and the AT state (normal) is entered, it is determined that the net increase in the number of advantageous zones specified by the net increase counter exceeds the second predetermined value. Also in this case, similarly to the case where it is specified that the number of games of the advantageous section has reached the first predetermined value, the state is shifted to the AT state (ED), and then at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section. When one of the conditions is established, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous section and the AT state are controlled to end. In addition, even in the AT state (normal) that is controlled after the addition state is finished, the navigation notification is controlled to be given in the game in which the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery.

On the other hand, after the sub-control unit 91 has determined that the transition to the ED state in the additional state and started the AT state effect (ED finalization), as described above, in the AT state (normal) the ED state As in the case where it is confirmed that the shift to the
When the process shifts to D), after the ED start suggestion effect is performed, the ED effect, the end condition notification, and the pre-end notification are performed in the period in which the AT state (ED) is controlled.

Then, the advantageous condition ending condition 1 established when the number of advantageous segment games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the advantageous segment established when the net number of advantageous segments specified based on the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the specified number. From the end of the game in which at least one of the end conditions 2 is satisfied, the AT state result notification and the end posterior notification are performed for a predetermined period, and control is performed to shift to the normal effect.

[About AT state production (normal)]
The AT state effect (normal) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

The AT state effect (normal) is an effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 when the main control unit 41 controls the AT state (normal). By doing so, it is suggested that the AT state (normal) is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, in the AT state (normal), the AT state effect image (normal)
(In this embodiment, the image of the character A) and the AT state normal background image (in this embodiment, the celestial body A)
And an image of outer space) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The AT state normal background image is A
The AT state effect (normal) is performed by displaying the AT state normal background image, which is an image of a mode different from the background image used in the T state effect (ED confirmation) or the ED effect. A player or the like can recognize that.

Further, when the AT state (normal) is being performed, the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, that is, the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of the assigned AT games is displayed. (In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a message image of “the number of remaining AT games” and a numerical image (for example, “100 games”) indicating the remaining number of AT games.

When the remaining number of AT games is larger than a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment), the AT game number display is displayed in a normal mode (non-flashing mode), and the remaining number of AT games is predetermined game. When the number is equal to or less than the number (3 games in this embodiment), it is displayed in an AT termination suggestion mode (red flashing mode in this embodiment). By displaying the AT game number display in the AT termination suggestion mode, the remaining number of AT games is less than or equal to the predetermined number, and the AT condition termination condition (A
The number of T games becomes 0) is suggested to be established soon.

Further, in the AT state (normal), an AT game history image (in the present embodiment, a number image showing the number of games controlled in the AT state (the number of games in the AT)) and the net increase in medals in the AT state (AT A numerical image indicating the medium net added number) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the game history during AT (the number of AT games, net added number).

As described above, the sub control unit 91 can perform the navigation effect when the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification, and when the AT state effect (normal) is being performed, the sub control unit 91 first performs the navigation effect. One mode (see FIG. 28 (a)) and a second mode (FIG. 28 (b)) different from the first mode.
It is possible to perform in any one of the presentation modes.

The effect mode of the navigation effect performed when the AT state effect (normal) is performed is determined to be either the first mode or the second mode in the effect mode lottery. In the production mode lottery, when it is not decided to shift to the addition state when performing the navigation production, the ratio is higher than that in the case where it is determined to shift to the addition state, which is higher than that in the second mode. Also determines that the navigation effect is to be performed in the first aspect, and when it is determined to shift to the additional state when performing the navigation effect, it is determined to shift to the additional state. The fact that the navigation effect is performed in the second mode rather than the first mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case where the navigation effect is not performed. As a result, when the navigation effect is performed in the second mode, it is possible that the transition to the additional state is determined as compared to when the navigation effect is performed in the first mode, that is, the AT game count is increased and the AT state is extended. It suggests that there is a high possibility that In the navigation effect, the effect mode is determined in the effect mode lottery when the navigation effect is performed, so that even when the same navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the first mode depending on the result of the effect mode lottery. In some cases, the navigation effect may be performed, or in the second aspect, the navigation effect may be performed.

As described above, when the sub control unit 91 wins in the additional lottery while performing the AT state effect (normal), the sub control unit 91 can perform the additional effect and suggest the result of the additional lottery.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the addition effect that is performed when the AT state effect (normal) is performed,
Additional suggestion image (normal) (message image showing the number of AT games given (for example, "+
100 Get! !! , Etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the number of AT games given as a result of the additional lottery. When displaying the additional suggestion image (normal) on the liquid crystal display 51, the AT game number display is in the state of being displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the additional suggestion image (normal) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The AT game number display is updated so that the AT game number won in the additional lottery suggested by the additional suggestion image (normal) is added.

[About added state production]
The addition state effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 34.

The add-on state effect is an effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 when the main control unit 41 controls the add-on state. By performing the add-on state effect, the add-on state effect is controlled. Suggest that

As shown in FIG. 30, the above-mentioned additional state includes additional states A to C having different expected values of the number of AT games that can be added, and the additional state effects include additional state effects A to C having different effect modes. Is included. The sub-control unit 91 performs the addition state effect according to the type of the addition state controlled by the main control unit 41 side. That is, the main control unit 41 side adds the state A
Control is performed to perform the addition state effect A, when the addition state B is controlled, the addition state effect B is controlled to be performed, and when the addition state C is controlled, the addition state effect C is performed. Control to do.

The addition state effect A is an addition state effect image A in a mode different from the effect images in the above-mentioned AT state effect and the addition state effects C and B (in the present embodiment, an image in which the characters A and B face each other, FIG. 31 ( a) (b) (c)), the above-mentioned AT state effect and additional state effect C
, B in a state different from the background image in the addition state background image A (in this embodiment, images of a plurality of effect lines, etc., see FIGS. 31 (a), (b), and (c)), the above-mentioned AT state effect and addition The additional suggestion image A in a mode different from the additional suggestion image in the state effects C and B (in the present embodiment, a message image suggesting the number of AT games provided (for example, “win +500 Get!
Etc.) (see FIG. 31C)) and the addition state result image A in a different state from the addition state result suggestion images in the addition state effects C and B (in the present embodiment, the image of the character A and the addition state A). A message image indicating the total number of AT games given in (for example,
“Total +800 Get !!”, etc.), see FIG. 32).

Further, the addition state effect A is ended when the addition state A ends, and a predetermined number of addition state games (three games in this embodiment) elapse, or ED It is determined that the state is to be entered (the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is the first predetermined number). To reach the end).

The addition state effect B is an addition state effect image B in a mode different from the effect images in the above-mentioned AT state effect and the addition state effects A and C (in the present embodiment, an image in which the character A is on a disk, FIG. a) (b) (c)), the additional state background image A (in the present embodiment, an image of the celestial body B and outer space, which is different from the background images in the above-mentioned AT state effect and additional state effects A and C). 33 (a) (b) (c)), the above-mentioned AT state effect and additional state effect A,
An additional image suggestion B different from the additional image suggestion in C (in the present embodiment, a message image suggesting the number of AT games given (eg, "+200 Get !!") and a star-shaped frame image, figure 33 (c)) and the addition state result image B in a mode different from the addition state result suggestion images in the addition state effects A and C (in the present embodiment, the image of the character A and the AT given in the addition state B). The production is performed using a message image indicating the total number of games (for example, “Total +500 Get !!” and the like) and a star-shaped frame image (see FIG. 34).

The addition state effect B is ended when the addition state B ends, and a predetermined number of addition state games (10 games in this embodiment) elapse,
Alternatively, it is determined that the transition to the ED state is established (the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is 1 reaches a predetermined number).

The add-on state effect B is a background image in the above-mentioned AT state effect and the above-mentioned AT state effect and the above-mentioned addition state effects A and B, which is different from the effect images in the above-mentioned AT state effect and the addition state effects A and B. An additional state background image C (not shown) different from the image, the above-mentioned AT
Addition state image C (not shown) that is different from the addition image in the state effects and the addition state effects A and B, and the addition state result image C that is different from the addition state result image in the addition state effects A and B (Not shown) is used to produce an effect.

Further, the addition state effect C is ended when the addition state C ends, and the predetermined number of addition state games (10 games in this embodiment) elapse,
Alternatively, it is determined that the transition to the ED state is established (the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is 1 reaches a predetermined number).

Further, in the addition state effects A to C, the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is not displayed, but the addition state display indicating that the addition state is controlled (in the present embodiment,
The “Change!” Message image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Also, while performing the addition state effects A to C, the target navigation target wins in the internal lottery,
When the navigation information is given on the main control unit 41 side, the navigation effect is given in the first mode.

[About operation request performance]
The operation request effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

The operation request effect is an effect for requesting the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, in the operation request effect, the sub control unit 91 displays the operation request image (in the present embodiment,
An image of the effect switch 56 and a message image (for example, “press!”) Suggesting that the effect switch 56 is pressed are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the operation of the effect switch 56 is accepted. Activate and wait. In this state, when the operation by pressing the effect switch 56 is detected, the operation request effect is ended.

Further, when the operation request effect is being performed, the AT game number is not displayed and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

[About ED transition confirmation suggestion production]
The ED transition confirmation suggestion effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect, in the AT state (normal) or in the addition state, the number of AT games is given by winning in the addition lottery, and as a result, the advantageous section game number counter becomes the first predetermined number which is the start condition of the ED control. When it is determined that at least one of the fact that the ED control is reached and that the net increase counter exceeds the second predetermined value that is the start condition of the ED control is satisfied, and the ED control is determined to be performed, the ED control is performed. It is an effect that suggests that it has been decided that the transfer to the ED state has been confirmed. As described above, when the ED control is performed, it is controlled to the AT state until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the sub control unit 91 relates to the ED control including the ED transition confirmation suggestive effect. Production (ED transition confirmation suggestion production, AT state production (E
ED control), ED confirmation suggestion display, ED effect, ED suggestion display)
It is suggested that the AT state is controlled, and that the AT state is controlled until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Indicates that the condition will be terminated.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect, the ED transition confirmation suggestion image (in the present embodiment, the image of the character A and the message image suggesting that the ending control is performed (for example, “Ending Get !!”). ) And the like) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that it is confirmed that the ED control is performed to shift to the ED state.

When the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is being performed, the AT game number is not displayed and the AT
The remaining number of games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

[About AT state effect (ED confirmed)]
The AT state effect (ED confirmation) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

The AT state effect (ED confirmation) is that the advantageous zone game number counter reaches the first predetermined value which is the start condition of the ED control, and the net additional number counter exceeds the second predetermined value which is the start condition of the ED control. ED control is performed until at least one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, ED
This is an effect that suggests that the AT state continues until the state is changed. AT state production (E
D confirmation) means that at least one of the advantage section game number counter reaching the first predetermined value and the net number increase counter exceeding the second predetermined value after the aforementioned ED transition confirmation suggesting effect is performed. It will take place over the period until it is approved.

As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, in the AT state effect (ED confirmation), the AT state effect image (ED confirmation) (the image of the character A in the present embodiment) and the ED transition confirmation suggestive background image (book). In the embodiment, the celestial body C and the image of outer space are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The ED transition confirmation suggestive background image is an image of a mode different from the background image used in the above-mentioned AT state production (normal), the addition state productions A to C, and the ED production described later, and the ED transition confirmation suggestive background By displaying the image, the player or the like can recognize that the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed.

Also, while the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed, ED control is then performed and E
An ED transition advance notification is performed to notify that the D state will be entered before the ED control is started.
The ED transition advance notification is performed when the ED transition advance notification is performed along with the start of the AT state effect (ED confirmation) triggered by the fact that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first predetermined value. Is a numerical image indicating the number of remaining games until the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, and transition to the ED state due to the lapse of the number of remaining games, and ED effect (ending)
ED confirmation suggestion display image including a message image suggesting that the
A character image of "1006 games until the end of the ending!" Is displayed to indicate the condition for shifting to the ED state. The number of advantageous section games is the first among the ED confirmation indication images
The number image indicating the number of remaining games until reaching the predetermined value is updated so that the number of remaining games is counted down at the start of each game (see FIGS. 36 (a) and (b)), and the number of advantageous section games is updated. In the game in which has reached the first predetermined value, that is, the game one game before the ED control is performed, an ED confirmation suggestion display image indicating that there is 0 game left until the transition to the ED state is displayed.

In the case of performing the ED transition advance notification, the ED transition advance notification is performed when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is started when the net increase number counter value is determined to exceed the second predetermined value. Indicates that the number image indicating the remaining net increase number until the net increase number counter value exceeds the second predetermined value and that the ED state is started by the transition to the ED state due to the lapse of the remaining number of games. ED confirmation suggestion display image including a message image to be displayed (for example,
A character image such as “1006 sheets until the end of the ending!” Is displayed to indicate the condition for shifting to the ED state.

In the AT state effect (ED confirmed), similarly to the AT state (normal), it is the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section, and indicates the number of AT games that have been granted (the number of AT games) (this In the embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a message image of “the number of remaining AT games” and a numerical image (for example, “1106 games”) indicating the remaining number of AT games. The number of AT games provided (the number of games remaining until the end of the advantageous section) is determined by the main controller 4
It is specified based on the AT game number counter value included in the command received from 1. In the AT game number display, by displaying the AT game number specified based on the AT game number counter value, the remaining number of AT games including the number of games during the period in which the ED control is performed is displayed. The remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number display is compared with the remaining number of AT games specified based on the ED transition advance notification (the number of games until ED control is started). Then, the number is increased by the number of games (100 games in this embodiment) during the period in which the ED control is performed.

In the AT game number display, the number of remaining AT games counted by the main control unit 41 may be displayed, or the number of remaining AT games counted by the sub control unit 91 may be displayed.

Further, when the navigation target winning combination is won by the internal lottery and the main controller 41 side notifies the navigation while the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed, the navigation effect is generated in the first mode. Do (
FIG. 37 (a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), in the AT state effect (ED confirmation), the ED start suggestion effect is performed at the end of the AT state effect (ED confirmation), that is, when the ED control is started. , An ED start suggestion image (in the present embodiment, an image of the character A and a message image indicating that ED control is started (for example, “Ending start”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and ED control is started. Suggest that it will be done.

[About ED production]
The ED effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

In the ED effect, when the ED control is performed and the ED state is entered, the advantageous-zone game number counter reaches the upper limit game number, which is the end condition of the advantageous section, and the net number of coins increase counter is the end-condition of the advantageous section. It is an effect that suggests that the AT state continues until at least one of the cases where the number of sheets exceeds a certain specified number is satisfied.

As shown in FIGS. 38A, 38B, and 38C, in the ED effect, the ED effect image (the image in which the character A is on the rocket in this embodiment) and the ED background image (the astronomical object in this embodiment) are used. C and the image of outer space) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The ED background image is an image of a mode different from the background image used in the above-mentioned AT state effect (normal), AT state effect (ED confirmed), and additional state effects A to C, and the ED background image is displayed. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the ED control is started but is being performed.

By performing the ED effect, it is suggested that the ED control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the ED state is controlled, and the advantageous section game number is the first predetermined value (140 in this embodiment).
(0 game), the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is almost satisfied, and the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). This suggests that the termination condition 2 will be met soon.

In this embodiment, the ED state is controlled by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an effect image and a background image different from the AT state effect (normal) and the AT state effect (ED confirmed) in the ED effect. In the ED effect, it is in the ED state by displaying a moving image or an image unique to the ED state, for example, an animation moving image related to the content corresponding to the model of the slot machine 1 in the ED effect. It may be configured to suggest.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (c), in the ED effect, the remaining advantageous section game number display indicating the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section and indicating the number of AT games that have been given is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51. Number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section (A given
The T game number) is specified based on the AT game number counter value included in the command received from the main control unit 41. In the display of the number of remaining advantageous section games, when the ED effect is performed when the advantageous section game number counter reaches the first predetermined value which is the start condition of the ED control, “the number of remaining ED games” is displayed. Message image and a number image indicating the number of remaining advantageous section games (for example, "99 games") are displayed. In the display of the number of remaining advantageous section games, the number image indicating the number of remaining advantageous section games is updated so that the number of games is counted down each time the game is played. In the remaining advantageous section game number display, since the AT game number specified based on the corrected AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is displayed, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. When this is done, it is possible to display that the number of remaining advantageous section games is 0, and although the number of remaining advantageous section games (the number of AT games given) is 1 or more, The advantageous zone is never terminated.

In the remaining advantageous section game number display, the number of remaining AT games counted by the main control unit 41 (the number of remaining advantageous section games) may be displayed, or the remaining AT game number counted by the sub control unit 91 ( The number of remaining advantageous section games) may be displayed.

On the other hand, when the ED effect is being triggered when the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the second predetermined value which is the start condition of the ED control, a character image (for example, "?
, Etc.) is displayed instead of a numerical image that suggests the number of remaining advantageous section games (not shown).
. When the ED effect is triggered by the fact that the number of medals net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is uncertain, and the remaining advantage is obtained. By not displaying a specific numerical value as the number of remaining advantageous section games in the number of section advantageous games display, the number of remaining advantageous section games suggested by the remaining advantageous section game number display and the number of remaining advantageous section games actually controlled are set. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a mismatch.

In the remaining advantageous section game number display, the number of medal net additions exceeds the second predetermined value even when the ED effect is performed when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. Even when the ED effect is being triggered, the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied or the estimated number of games may be displayed, or until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. The number of games may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the ED effect, an ED indicating that ED control is being performed.
A suggestion display (in this embodiment, a character image of “Congratulations!”) Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 in which the message image of “remaining ED game number” is displayed in the above-described remaining advantageous section game number display. It is possible. The ED suggestion display is controlled to blink by alternately switching between a display state and a non-display state at predetermined time intervals. In the display state, one of the display areas of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. In the display of the number of remaining advantageous section games, the message image of "the number of remaining ED games" is displayed in the area where it is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the ED effect, an ending condition for notifying that the advantageous section is ended when the ending condition of the advantageous section (at least one of the ending condition 1 or the ending condition 2) is satisfied. The notification can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the termination condition notification, the number-of-games image showing the number of games that is the difference between the current number of advantageous section games and the upper limit number of games (for example, “
The character image of “099 more games”) and the number image showing the difference between the current net increased number of medals and the specified number (for example, the character image of “reaching 292 more”) and the game A character image indicating that the advantageous section is ended by being played for the number of games of the difference or by increasing the number of medals net increase by the number of the difference (in the present embodiment, the character of “advantageous section limiter fixed” is displayed). Image) is included. In the end condition notification, these game number image, number image, and character image are displayed in the display area between the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can easily recognize it during the game.

In addition, the end condition notification is controlled by blinking display in which the display state and the non-display state are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. While the player can recognize the difference between the number of games and the number of medals net increase,
When in the non-display state, the contents of the image on the rear side of the termination condition notification (AT game history image in this embodiment) can be recognized.

Further, in the blinking display control of the end condition notification, when the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is relatively close to the satisfaction, that is, the difference in the number of advantageous section games and the difference in the net number of medals increase. The smaller the number of coins, the longer the condition in which the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, that is, the number of games in the difference in the number of advantageous section games and the difference in the number of medals net increase are relatively large. The advantageous state end notice image is switched between the display state and the non-display state so that the state time is long and the non-display state time is short. As a result, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are relatively close to each other, the ending condition notification is emphasized and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38C, in the ED effect, when the number of games of the difference between the current number of advantageous section games and the upper limit number of games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment). ,
A pre-completion notice is given to indicate that the advantageous section is about to end and to indicate in advance that the relevant section will be completed. In the end pre-notification, the number of games that is the difference between the current number of advantageous section games and the upper limit number of games, that is, the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section is indicated by an end advance indication image (in the present embodiment, "3 more Ending in the game! "Message image)
Is displayed in the same area of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 as the area in which the ED confirmation suggestion display image is displayed in the ED transition advance notification. By performing the end pre-notification in the same display area of the liquid crystal display 51 where the ED transition pre-notification is displayed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end.

Further, in the ED effect, even when the difference between the current number of medals net increase in the advantageous zone and the specified number is less than or equal to a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 6 medals corresponding to the net number increase of three games), Pre-completion notification is given to indicate that the advantageous section is about to end, and also indicate in advance that the relevant section will be terminated (not shown). When the difference between the current number of medals and the specified number of medals in the advantageous zone is equal to or less than a predetermined number (6 in this embodiment, which corresponds to the number of medals added in three games) or less, the advance advance notification indicates the advance advance. A character image (for example, an image such as "?") That does not show a specific numerical value in the image (not shown) is displayed in place of the numerical image suggesting the number of remaining advantageous section games (not shown). In addition, when displaying a character image that does not show a specific numerical value in the advance advance notification, a character image that does not show a specific numerical value (for example, an image such as "?") Is displayed in the remaining advantageous section game number display. , And control is performed so that the number of remaining advantageous section games is displayed instead of a numerical image. As a result, when the ED effect is being triggered by the fact that the number of medals net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is uncertain. , By not displaying a specific numerical value as the number of remaining advantageous section games in the end prior notification, there is a mismatch between the number of remaining advantageous section games suggested by the end prior notification and the number of remaining advantageous section games actually controlled. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when it occurs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the ED effect, in the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit number of games. A post-event notification will be made to indicate the end. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the maximum number of games,
In the end posterior notification in the game in which the advantageous section is ended, an end posterior suggestion image indicating that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied (in the present embodiment, “the number of advantageous section games is the upper limit (1500
The message image of "I have reached the game)" is displayed in the same area as the area in which the above-mentioned advance notice of ending and advance notice of ED transition are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. By displaying the end post notification, the end prior notification, and the ED transition advance notification in the same area of the liquid crystal display 51,
It is possible to make the player easily recognize the notification content regarding the end of the advantageous section.

The sub control unit 91 is adapted to display the number of AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 as the remaining advantageous section game number display, and the advantageous section game number becomes the upper limit game number. In the game in which the posterior end notification indicating that the game has arrived is displayed, 0 is displayed as the number of remaining advantageous section games in the remaining advantageous section game number display. As a result, it is possible for the player or the like to recognize that the advantageous section is ended in a state in which the number of assigned AT games is not left.

Further, in the ED effect, the end posterior notification is given even in the game in which the advantageous section is finished because the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. When the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number and the advantageous period is ended in the post-post notification in the game, an end posterior suggestion image (not shown, for example, " A message image “The number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the specified value (2388)” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the specified number.

It should be noted that the post-notification of the end is made in the case where the advantageous section game reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section is ended, or when the net medal increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number and the advantageous section is ended. Alternatively, the configuration may be performed in a common display mode (for example, a display mode in which a message image of “the advantageous section has reached the upper limit” is displayed). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end condition (at least one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied by the end post notification.

In addition, in the ED production, even in a game in which the advantageous section is to be ended, the end condition is notified and, for example, "End with 177 more games or 000 more games."
By displaying the character image and the like, the end condition notification also notifies that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the ED effect, at the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends (for example, the rotation of all reels is stopped, and the third stop switch pressing operation ends). (For example, when it is done), the result of the advantageous section is notified. In the result notification of the advantageous section, in the result notification, a character image, a numerical image showing the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section (for example, an image of “2308”), and a numerical image showing the number of games controlled in the AT state (for example, , "1154 game") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the game result in the advantageous section. After the notification of the result of the advantageous section, the start operation for starting the next game (the operation of the start switch 7 in the state where the specified number of bets is set) is performed, and the result of the advantageous section is obtained. End the notification and shift to the normal effect (see FIG. 39 (c))
.

In addition, the end posterior notification is performed until the predetermined number of games have passed even after the notification of the result of the advantageous section, and after the notification of the result of the advantageous section, the end posterior suggestion image is displayed. The liquid crystal display 51 displays an initialization suggestion image (in this embodiment, a message image of “information about navigation notification has been initialized”) indicating that the advantageous zone data has been initialized. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the end posterior notification is continuously performed even when the notification of the result of the advantageous section is ended and the normal effect is started. The initialization suggestion image is displayed to indicate that the advantageous zone data has been initialized, so that the number of AT games given in the previous advantageous zone and the winning result of the additional state lottery etc. can be taken over thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is no so-called AT state latency.

In addition, in the ED effect, at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended, in order to call attention to the devotion to the game at the slot machine 1 for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, at least 3 seconds or more) Notify the user to prevent slipping in. In the slip-in prevention notification, the slip-in prevention image (in the present embodiment, a message image of "Pachi-slot is a moderately enjoyable game. Be careful of slip-in.") Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the result notification of the advantageous section is finished before the predetermined time (in this embodiment, at least 3 seconds or more), the slip-in prevention notification is transferred to the normal effect or the settlement process described later. However, even if it is displayed, it is continuously displayed until the predetermined time continues.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the sub-control unit 91 determines that the game is not being played during the period until the above-described predetermined number of games has elapsed, as the termination condition for the termination posterior notification. When the settlement switch 10 is operated, that is, when the settlement process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, control is performed so that the end posterior notification is finished.

The sub-control unit 91, when the settlement process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, a settlement suggestion image (in the present embodiment, an image of a predetermined character and a message image of “settled!” (FIG. 40).
(See (b)) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the settlement process is performed. Then, after the settlement process is finished on the side of the main control unit 41, the display of the settlement suggestion image is finished by a predetermined time, and the normal production is performed. Further, after the settlement process is completed on the main control unit 41 side, the setting operation of the bet number is performed until a predetermined time elapses, thereby ending the display of the settlement suggestion image and shifting to the normal production. To do. Incidentally, when transitioning to the normal effect after the settlement suggestion image is displayed, the end posterior notification is not performed (FIG. 40 (d
)reference). In addition, the above-mentioned intrusion prevention notification is given for a predetermined time (at least 3 in this embodiment).
When the settlement processing is started and the settlement suggestion image is displayed before the elapse of (more than a second), the display is continued with the settlement suggestion image for the period until the predetermined time passes. Becomes

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the sub-control unit 91 determines, as a termination condition of the termination posterior notification, that a game is not being played in the period until the above-described predetermined number of games have passed (at least the following). When the predetermined period (3 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed after the state in which the number of bets for starting the game has not been set is continued, control is performed to end the post-post notification. The main control unit 41 keeps a state in which no game is played (at least a state in which the number of bets for starting the next game is not set) for a predetermined period (3 minutes in this embodiment).
Can be controlled to the demonstration state (demonstration state) by the passage of, and the sub control unit 91 performs the demonstration effect (demonstration effect) when the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the demonstration state.

In the demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), for example, the contents of characters and stories that appear in the effect of the slot machine 1, images and images explaining the effect to be executed, a configuration table of the roles in the slot machine 1, By displaying an image showing the payout table, the symbol arrangement of the reels, the flow of the game, etc. on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the game is not played in the slot machine 1. Then, the sub-control unit 91 ends the demonstration effect and shifts to the normal effect by performing the bet number setting operation during the execution of the demonstration effect. It should be noted that when transitioning to the normal effect after the end of the demonstration effect, the end posterior notification is not made (FIG. 40 (d)).
reference).

[Operation effect 1]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a slot machine that is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and that is provided with an advantageous state lamp that is turned on for a period while being controlled to the advantageous state. In the slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration is given to the timing of turning on or turning off the advantageous state lamp.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the lottery result of the internal lottery is the target winning combination transition lottery target and that the advantageous period changing lottery shifts to the advantageous period. In this case, it is possible to shift the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section which is advantageous to the player, and the section display LED 12a (the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display unit 12R that notifies the player of the shift to the advantageous section is displayed. Eighth segment), after shifting to the advantageous section,
At the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied by first performing the navigation notification, it is possible to start lighting the section display LED 12a and notify that the advantageous section has been entered. The section display LED 12a is started to be turned on before the navigation notification is given. With such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting of the section display LED 12a and notify that the section is being controlled to the advantageous section by the time navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the lighting of the section display LED 12a and then start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, but the section display LED 12a is turned on and the game auxiliary display 12 is started. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the display of the navigation notification in (3) is started at the same time. Even with such a configuration, the section display LED 12a will be displayed by the time navigation notification is given in the advantageous section.
It is possible to notify that the control is performed in the advantageous section by starting the lighting of.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main controller 41 can end the advantageous section when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied while controlling the advantageous section. The section display LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the section has been finished is provided, and when it is an advantageous section, the section display LED 12a
Is a configuration for controlling the lighting state, the main control unit 41, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a specific result (small winning combination), different symbol combinations depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop the reel on the reels. At this time, since the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is different depending on the stopped symbol combination, pay attention to the notification by the section display LED 12a. You can

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a predetermined result (replay combination), a different symbol combination depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop the reels, and at this time, since the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is common due to the stopped symbol combination, the game is suggested by the section display LED 12a. It can prevent people from being confused.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as a credit,
The configuration is such that the number of medals stored as credits can be settled when the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is performed, and the main control unit 41 is stopped by the reel when the advantageous section is ended. After that, in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Therefore, the player finishes the game after recognizing that the advantageous section has ended. can do.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays a section at a timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed when the small winning combination ends and the advantageous section ends. Since the LED 12a is configured to notify the end of the advantageous section,
After recognizing that the medals have been paid out, the fact that the advantageous section has ended can be notified.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the replay combination wins and ends the advantageous section, the section is started at the timing after the notification of the fact that the replay is given is completed by starting the lighting of the LED 20 during the replay. Since the display LED 12a is configured to notify that the advantageous zone has ended, it is possible to indicate that the advantageous zone has ended after recognizing that the re-game has been given.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, all reels 2L,
After the rotation of 2C and 2R is stopped, and before the notification that the insertion of the medal is possible by the start of lighting of the insertion request LED 17, the advantageous section is ended by the section display LED 12a. Since it is configured to notify that, the player can be prevented from inserting a medal to start the next game without knowing that the advantageous section has ended.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has stop switches 8L, 8 which are advantageous for the player.
C and 8R navigation notification for notifying the operation mode and a game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player in accordance with the winning of the small winning combination, and the game auxiliary display is provided during the period of controlling the advantageous zone. It is possible to control the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the device 12 as a section display LED 12a to a lighting state, and to notify that the advantageous section has been transitioned. Since a part is used as the section display LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended, the navigation notification and the number of medals to be paid out are used as display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted. It is not necessary to provide the main control section 41 with a display means separate from the game auxiliary display 12 to be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays a part of the game auxiliary display 12 by the section display LED 12
It is configured to use as a to inform that the advantageous zone has been shifted to and that the advantageous zone has ended, but the display means provided separately from the game auxiliary display 12 is used as the zone display LED 12a to shift to the advantageous zone. Alternatively, for example, a display means such as an LED or a lamp, which is separate from the game auxiliary display 12, is arranged in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12, and the advantageous section is moved to by using the display. It may be configured to notify that the effect and the advantageous section have ended. According to this configuration, display means for notifying that the advantageous zone has been transitioned and that the advantageous zone has ended is provided separately from the game auxiliary display 12, so that a display for notifying that the advantageous zone has been transitioned is displayed. The display can be clearly distinguished from other displays, and even in this case, since the display is provided in the vicinity of the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking.

It should be noted that, for example, a display means for notifying that the advantageous zone has been moved and the advantageous zone has ended
Credit display device 11 and game auxiliary display device 12, which are provided in the game display unit 13, request L
By arranging it on the substrate on which various display devices such as the ED 17 are arranged, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display device 12, and the player can be prevented from overlooking. In addition, by disposing display means for notifying that the player has moved to the advantageous section, for example, by disposing switches such as the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 which are operated at the start or end of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 turns on the section display LED 12a at the start of a game in which the section display start condition is satisfied after the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. Is started to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted, while at the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, the section display LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended. The main control unit 41 lights the section display LED 12a at the end of the game to be shifted to the advantageous section to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted, and turns off the section display LED 12a at the end of the game to end the advantageous section. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the fact that the advantageous section is ended is notified.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is provided with a section display LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted to and that the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the display LED 12a to the off state, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In the main processing, processing for setting the state control data (light off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a Before performing the above, the AT state management process is configured to initialize the predetermined area in the RAM 41c in which the data regarding the advantageous section is stored and initialize the data regarding the advantageous section.
Despite the fact that 12a has been controlled to the off state and the advantageous section has ended,
It is possible to prevent data regarding the advantageous section from remaining in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data regarding the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (light off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. By performing the process, the data regarding the advantageous section is initialized before the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in the off state.
The configuration may be such that the data regarding the advantageous section is initialized at the same time as the control for turning off the light.
For example, by setting the processing for setting the state control data (light off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a and the processing for initializing the data regarding the advantageous section in the timer interrupt processing performed at the same timing, The control for turning off the section display LED 12a and the process for initializing the data regarding the advantageous section can be performed at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data regarding the advantageous section before controlling the section display LED 12a to the off state, but after initializing the data regarding the advantageous section, the section display is performed. A configuration may be used in which the LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data regarding the advantageous section from being initialized during the period in which the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state.

In the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the data regarding the advantageous period in the AT state management process before performing the process of setting the state control data (light off) in the output buffer of the period display LED 12a. The RAM 41c is configured to perform an initialization process for initializing a predetermined region of the RAM 41c, and the predetermined region of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. Since the data regarding the advantageous section to be converted does not include the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, the state control data (lighting off) is stored in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. Before performing the process of setting, the state set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. Patronized data (lit) is, since there is no be initialized by the initialization process in the AT state management process, reliably segment display preferably up period is completed LE
The D12a can be controlled to be in a lighting state.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous section). It is possible to update the net increase counter for counting (the number obtained by subtracting the number), and the net increase of medals in the advantageous zone specified based on the value (In the present embodiment, the value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 from 2400 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number) When it exceeds, that is, when the net number of medals to be added in the advantageous zone reaches the prescribed number + 1 or more, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous zone. Allowed by a configuration in which shift to the normal interval, the main controller 4
When updating the net increase counter, the value 1 is added to the net increase counter by a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals in the game, and is subtracted by the value of the medals used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained is less than 0, the net increase counter value is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the net increase counter is set to be the net increase counter value. By controlling to update the value, after the start of the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of medals is counted from the point where the net increase in medals is the most decreased, and based on the net increase number counter value. When the net number of medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to.
According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in the gaming value has decreased the most, the advantageous section is ended when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number, and the normal section Even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals after the increase in medals exceeds the specified number. Since the section will end, not only the net increase of medals in the advantageous section,
The net increase in medals after the start of the advantageous zone can also be limited to a range based on the specified number.

In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 specifies the payout amount value of the medal to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game in the advantageous section. , Based on the net increase amount value obtained by adding the payout amount to the net increase amount value specified based on the net increase amount counter, and subtracting the number of medals used for the bet number from the added net increase amount value. A configuration for updating the net additional number counter, that is, the net additional number of medals in the advantageous section counted by the net additional number counter is calculated based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section. But,
The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone may be at least the number of medals given to the player minus the medals used in the game by setting the bet number by the player. If the winning of a specified small winning role accompanied by the provision of a medal is allowed, and the player can win the winning of the small winning role, it cannot be won. In such a case, it may be possible to count the medals that are awarded on the assumption that the winning of the small winning combination has occurred as the medals awarded to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 reads a net increase value specified on the basis of the net increase counter into a predetermined register, and then, The payout amount value of the medal to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag, the payout amount is added to the net increase amount value of the predetermined register, and the number of medals used to set the bet number is subtracted from the added net increase amount value. Although it is configured to perform a net increase number counter that is updated based on the net increase number value obtained by performing the above, the main control unit 41, when updating the net increase number counter, determines whether By adding the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of medals used to set the bet number in the game to the net increase counter, the net increase Counter may be updated to configure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, when determining whether or not the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number in the AT state management process, the net number increase specified based on the net number increase counter. After reading the numerical value into the predetermined register, specify the payout amount value of the medal to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game, add the payout amount to the net increase amount value of the predetermined register, and bet from the net increase amount value after addition. By subtracting the number of medals used to set the number, a net increase value in the game is calculated in a predetermined register, and it is determined whether or not the net increase value in the predetermined register exceeds a specified number. However, the main control unit 41 determines the net increase in the number of medals based on the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used to set the bet number in the game. The calculated net increase is added to the net increase counter, the net increase counter is updated, and then it is determined whether or not the medal's net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number based on the net increase counter value. It may be configured.

Further, in this embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter, and makes a bet. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used for setting the number is less than 0, the net increase counter value is corrected to 0. Is less than 0, the numerical value below 0 is not counted and 0
Although it is configured to count only numerical values above, the main control unit 41 may be configured to count numerical values below 0, that is, a configuration to count the net increase in gaming value in the negative range. For example, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase counter to 0 at the start of the advantageous section, and then, when the medals are paid out during the advantageous section, the value of the paid-out medals is netly increased. When the number of medals is used to set the bet number, the net number of medals in the advantageous zone is counted by repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of medals from the net number increase counter. Thus, it is possible to count both when the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0 and when it is more than 0.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals based on the net increase count counter value after the start of the advantageous zone, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. The main control unit 41, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is triggered by the uniform setting after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in medals up to the present starting from is greater than the specified number. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous zone is ended and transitioned to the normal zone. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous zone is set uniformly, Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from the time other than when the transition to the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section is determined based on the net increase number counter value. It is possible to simplify the control constant to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals based on the net increase count counter value after the start of the advantageous zone, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. The main control unit 41 uses the uniformly set timing after the start of the advantageous section as a trigger to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then the section display LED 12a suggests that the section has moved to the AT state, and the navigation notification notifies the medal. When the operation mode for increasing the number is notified, if the net increase in medals up to the present, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be shifted. , The starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LED 12 It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a time other than when the navigation mode informs that the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals based on the net increase count counter value after the start of the advantageous zone, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. The main control unit 41, regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, as a trigger uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, When the section display LED 12a suggests that the state has shifted to the AT state, the advantageous section may be terminated and the section may shift to the normal section when the net increase in medals up to the present starting from According to this structure, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the navigation Regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals has been notified by knowledge, the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from a time other than when the section display LED 12a suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net number-of-addition counter value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification that notifies the operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery during the advantageous section.
AT including the state and a sign state that the navigation notification is not performed even if the target object for navigation is won by internal lottery
It is possible to control to a control state relating to AT, and when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management processing, regardless of whether the control state relating to AT is the AT state,
When a prize is generated with payout of medals, the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase of medals in the advantageous section. When the control state related to the AT is a control state other than the AT state in the advantageous section when updating, the winning target for the navigation is won by the internal lottery, and the stop switch 8L is operated in an advantageous operation mode for the player. When 8C and 8R are operated and the number of medals is increased, the increased amount is added to the net additional number counter, and the target object for navigation is won in the internal lottery.
When the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated and the medals do not increase in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the net additional number counter is not incremented, and the AT-related control state is the AT state during the advantageous period. When the target object for navigation is won in the internal lottery, the operation mode is advantageous for the player regardless of whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the medals are increased in the operation mode advantageous for the player. Stop switch 8L, 8C
, 8R may be added to the net additional number counter when the number of medals is increased to count the net additional number of medals in the advantageous section. According to this configuration, it is advantageous for the player in the advantageous section. In the omen state where the operation mode is not notified, etc., when the medal actually increases even if the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, it is added to the net number-up counter and if the medal cannot be increased. In the AT state where the advantageous operation mode for the player is notified in the advantageous section without adding to the net increase counter, it is determined whether or not the medals actually increase when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. Regardless of whether or not the player actually increases the medals, the net addition counter is incremented regardless of whether or not the medals have actually increased. In the situation where the player can not surely increase the medal while preventing the intentional extension of the advantageous section by adding the number counter, the net additional number counter is set only when the medal actually increases. By adding, it can be prevented that the player is disadvantaged.

Also, when updating the net increase counter, if the control state related to the AT is in a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section, it increases when the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery and the number of medals increases. Minutes are added to the net increase counter and the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, but when the medal does not increase, the net increase counter is not added and the AT related control state is in the advantageous zone. In addition, when the navigation target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether or not the number of medals has increased, the increase amount of medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player. Is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase of medals in the advantageous section.
The predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals does not change in the lottery result of the internal lottery regardless of which control state is related to the AT in the advantageous section. In the case of a small winning combination, regardless of whether or not the number of medals has been increased by operating in a predetermined operation mode, the increase amount of medals when operated in a predetermined operation mode is added to the net increase counter to obtain an advantageous section. In the configuration, the net increase in the number of medals may be counted. According to this configuration, if the player can increase the medals during the advantageous section, it is irrelevant whether or not the medals are actually increased. By adding the net increase counter, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally lengthened.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the condition that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, and that the number of net additions in the advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined prescribed number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games. , If it is determined that the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games, without determining whether or not the number of net additions in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number,
Since the advantageous section data is initialized to end the advantageous section, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, if it is established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, Since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the net additional number exceeds the specified number, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination whether the net increased number of the advantageous section exceeds the specified number.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the condition that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, and that the number of net additions in the advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined prescribed number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit number of games. If not, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number. Therefore, in the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone game number has reached the upper limit game number. Since the determination is made, in the case where the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number and the advantageous section is ended, rather than the control relating to the determination of whether or not the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit game number. It can be omitted control net increase number of miscellaneous advantageous interval according to determining whether more than a defined number.

In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. In this case, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the number of net additions in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number.
In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of net additions in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. If the number of net additions in the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is possible. According to this configuration, the frequency of the number of advantageous section net additions exceeding the specified number may be higher than the frequency of reaching the upper limit number of advantageous section games. It is possible to omit the control related to the determination of the infrequent event.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the condition that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, and that the number of net additions in the advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number. If the advantageous number of games is reached when the number of advantageous period games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net number of advantageous period games exceeds the specified number, If the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games or one of the number of net additions in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the same advantageous section data initialization processing is performed and common data (data related to the advantageous section) is executed. Since it is configured to be initialized, the number of advantageous section games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. When both of them are established, the common data is initialized when either the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone or the one in which the number of net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number is established. It is possible to prevent a difference in degree of advantage between the case where both of these conditions are satisfied and the case where only one of these conditions is satisfied.

For example, if the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone as the first condition and the advantageous zone ends, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized and the second condition is set as the second condition. Both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the configuration in which the data corresponding to the second condition is initialized only when the net increase in the advantageous interval exceeds the specified number and the advantageous interval ends. Then, when the advantageous section ends, if the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are both initialized, the game is played more than when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. However, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, the same data as when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is provided. By initializing the above, there is a difference in advantage between the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. It can be prevented.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games in the AT state management process, and that the net increase in the number of advantageous zones exceeds a predetermined number. Since the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, so the advantageous section continues for a long period of time. Even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time, if the number of medals increases rapidly in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends because the net increase in the number of advantageous sections exceeds the specified number. It is possible to prevent the degree of advantage in the advantageous section from increasing excessively.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the control state data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a when the section display start condition is satisfied, and interrupt 1
After performing the waiting process, by controlling to display the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display device 12 in the instruction setting process, after starting the lighting of the section display LED 12a, the game auxiliary display device 12 In the game in which the navigation notification is started, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification in the game in which the section display LED 12a suggests that the section has moved to the advantageous section. In addition, the section display LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section has been transitioned at a timing prior to the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. In a game in which the LED 12a suggests that the player has moved to the advantageous section, the number of medals is increased by the navigation notification. That the stop switch 8L, 8C, when the operation mode of the 8R is informed, stop switch 8L to increase the medal by the navigation notification, 8C, 8R
Since it is suggested by the section display LED 12a that the advantageous section has been moved before the operation mode is notified, the stop switch 8L for increasing the number of medals in the game after recognizing the shift to the advantageous section. , 8C, 8R can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 suggests that the section display LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification. In the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied, the stop switch 8L for increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification,
At the same timing as when the operation modes of 8C and 8R are notified, the section display LED 12
It is also possible to have a configuration in which the lighting of a is started and it is suggested that the player has shifted to the advantageous section. According to this configuration, in the game in which the section display LED 12a suggests that the player has shifted to the advantageous section, the number of medals is increased by the navigation notification. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to be notified is notified, the advantageous section is displayed by the section display LED 12a at the same timing as the notification of the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medal by the navigation notification. Since it is suggested that the shift to the advantageous section is made, the shift to the advantageous section and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R for increasing the medals can be recognized at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 suggests that the section display LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification. However, the section display LED1
In the game in which the shift to the advantageous section is suggested by 2a, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, the stop switch 8L for increasing the medals by the navigation, A configuration that suggests that the section display LED 12a is started to be turned on after the operation modes of 8C and 8R are notified to indicate that the section has moved to the advantageous section may be obtained. In the suggested game, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increase medals by navigation notification
When the operation mode of is notified, the navigation display notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to increase the medal, and then the section display LED 12a suggests that the section has moved to the advantageous section. After the notification of the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the value, it is possible to focus on the timing at which the transition to the advantageous section is suggested.

[Effect 2]
Designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate when a conventional slot machine is configured to control an advantageous section that can inform an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, or in a state where the winning of the special prize has been carried over. There are configurations that have been made.

In the configuration where the payout rate of medals is designed to be appropriate in the state where the winning of special prize has been carried over like the latter slot machine, when the slot machine is first installed in the game store or the data When is initialized, it is necessary to play the game at the game shop side until the special prize is won so that the payout rate of the medals becomes appropriate. On the other hand, in the former slot machine which controls to the advantageous section, if the configuration can be controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game is played on the game store side until the special winning is won, before the player plays the game. Since there is a possibility of being controlled to an advantageous section, there is a risk that fairness will be impaired when a player plays a game.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the special combination (BB) It is possible to carry over the winning of the next game after the next game, and the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player when the small winning combination in the pushing order is won in the internal lottery. It is possible to perform a navigation notification to notify, and it is possible to control to an advantageous section where the correct push order can be notified by the navigation notification, and the winning of the special part (BB) is carried over. Stop switches 8L, 8C, which are more advantageous due to navigation notifications inside
It is possible to inform the operation mode of 8R (correct answer pushing order), and it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside the inside, and the winning of the special part (BB) is not carried over It is possible to control to the advantageous section in both inside and inside, and the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, while in the non-inside The end condition of the advantageous section is that end condition 3 is satisfied,
The condition for ending the advantageous section in the inside is different from the condition for ending the advantageous section in the non-inside.
According to this configuration, the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside, while the payout rate of medals is incorrect during non-internal. Since the end condition of the advantageous section is different, it is possible to perform suitable control depending on whether it is inside or outside.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by the navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate in the inside, while in the non-inside In the above, the payout rate of medals is improper, and it is possible to control to the advantageous section both in the inside and inside, and whether the game state is in the non-inside in each game in the advantage section. If it is determined that it is in the non-internal, it is controlled to end the advantageous section at the end of the game, so that the advantageous section starts when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal In this game, the advantageous section is ended.
According to this configuration, while the payout rate of medals is proper in the inside, while the payout rate of medals is not proper in the non-internal, when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal Since the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, even if the player is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game shop side plays until the payout rate of medals is inside, the player can play the game. It is possible to prevent the fair zone from being impaired when the player plays the game because the advantageous section ends before the game is played.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the non-internal state in each game in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is in the non-internal section, the advantageous section is ended at the end of the game. By controlling so that when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts. For example, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal only in the first game of the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration or the like for controlling the end of the section may be used.

In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 has an arbitrary condition (end condition 3) among the end conditions of the advantageous section.
), The fact that the game state is non-internal is applied, and the advantageous period is ended when the game state controlled in the game in the advantageous period is non-internal. By the control, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section starts. However, as an arbitrary condition, the controlled game state is inside. The above may be applied, and when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section may be ended assuming that an arbitrary condition is satisfied when the inside is set. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game in which the gaming state is specified to change from non-inside to inside is referred to by referring to the game state of the game and the winning situation of the special role. In the game in which the winning of the special role is specified), the control is made so as to end the advantageous section, so that when the advantageous section is controlled in non-internal, an arbitrary condition is satisfied when it is in the internal As a result, the advantageous section can be ended. Further, the advantageous section may be terminated when the arbitrary condition is satisfied when it is inside. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, the game state in which the game state is changed from non-internal to internal is referred to by referring to the game state of the game and the game state of the previous game (previous game In the game where the current game is inside in the inside), the control is made so as to end the advantage section, so that when the advantage section is controlled in the non-inside, the optional condition when the inside becomes It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section is ended assuming that
According to this configuration, while the payout rate of medals is proper in the inside, while the payout rate of medals is not proper in the non-internal, when the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal Since the advantageous section is ended when it is in the middle, even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game is played at the game store side until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate inside, before the player plays the game Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fairness from being impaired when the player plays the game because the advantageous section ends.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled as a non-internal, an internal, and a special state as a game state, and the special state is a combination of special symbols (RB) in the BB general and the BB general. Including the RB that is transitioned by being derived, BB in general, the probability that the special combination (RB) that is allowed to derive the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery is the normal state (
It is a higher state than (inside inside and inside), and the probability that a small winning combination that allows the derivation of a symbol combination of a small winning role with a medal is won in the internal lottery is inside and inside It is a state higher than that, and in the general BB, the control is not performed in the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, in the general BB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, and therefore unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the general BB is not required.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled as a non-internal, an internal, and a special state as a game state, and the special state is a combination of special symbols (RB) in the BB general and the BB general. Including the RB that is transitioned by being derived, BB in general, the probability that the special combination (RB) that is allowed to derive the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery is the normal state (
It is a higher state than (inside inside and inside), and the probability that a small winning combination that allows the derivation of a symbol combination of a small winning role with a medal is won in the internal lottery is inside and inside This is a higher state, and in RB, the control is not performed in the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, in the RB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, so unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB is not required.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a state other than BB general (non-internal, internal, RB), the special combination (RB) is not the target of the internal lottery, while the gaming state is BB.
When it is general, it becomes a target of internal lottery, and in BB general, the probability that a special combination (RB) that allows the derivation of the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is won in the internal selection is a normal state (non- It is a structure that is higher than (inside and inside), but even when the game state is controlled to be inside or not inside, in a configuration in which the special combination (RB) is targeted for the lottery in the internal lottery. ,
The probability that a special role (RB) will win in the internal lottery in the general BB is higher than the probability that the special role (RB) will win in the internal lottery in at least one of the non-internal state and the internal state. It may be configured.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 that can execute the internal suggestion that indicates that the inside has been reached, and the main control that can execute the section display that indicates that the section is controlled to the advantageous section. The sub-control unit 91 suggests that the game has been transferred to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game in which the game state is transferred from the non-inside to the inside. While the internal suggestion can be performed using the liquid crystal display 51, the main control unit 41 causes the section display LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.
It is possible to display the section by using, and the position where the internal suggestion is executed and the position where the internal display is executed are different, and the timing when the internal suggestion is executed and the section display is executed. The timing is different.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the suggestion that the inside has been reached by the inside suggestion and the suggestion that the advantageous zone has been displayed by the zone display.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by the navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate in the inside, while in the non-inside In the above configuration, the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and the main control unit 41 capable of displaying the section indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section is provided. It is possible to control to the section, and the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) for performing the navigation notification while controlling the inside and the advantageous section. After the transition to, by controlling to display the section in the game that first notifies the navigation, it is possible to display the section when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the inside, but not in the inside. If it is controlled advantageously section by There is a configuration that does not execute a section view.
According to this configuration, while the medal payout rate is proper in the inside, while the medal payout rate is improper in the non-inside, the medal payout rate becomes appropriate in the advantageous section in the inside. It is possible to execute the section display when controlled, but the section display is not executed when the medal payout rate is controlled to an advantageous section during non-internal where the payout rate is improper.
In a situation where a game is played on the game shop side, unnecessary section display is not executed until the inside of the game where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by the navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate in the inside, while in the non-inside In the configuration, the payout rate of medals is improper, and the main control unit 41 capable of executing the section display indicating that the medal is controlled to the advantageous section, and the internal inside suggesting that the inside is indicated The sub-control unit 91 capable of executing the above is provided, and the main control unit 41 has a configuration capable of performing control in the advantageous section in both non-internal and internal sections. , It is possible to shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) for performing the navigation notification, and after the transition to the advantageous section, by controlling to display the section in the game that first performs the navigation notification, Non-internal In the case where the sub-control unit 91 does not display the section when it is controlled to the advantageous section, the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect to be performed when it is controlled to the non-inside, when the non-inside is moved to the inside. When the control is performed in the inside, the internal production is not performed when the internal production is controlled, and the normal production performed in the internal production is performed. It is a structure that executes medium suggestions.
According to this configuration, while the medal payout rate is proper inside, while the medal payout rate is improper inside the non-inside, the medal payout rate is appropriate inside the advantageous section. The section display can be executed when controlled, but the section display by the main control unit 41 is not executed when the section is displayed in the advantageous section during non-internal where the payout rate of the medal is improper. In the situation where the game is played on the game store side until the payout rate becomes appropriate, the unnecessary suggestion is not executed, but when the inside shifts from the non-inside to the inside, the sub-control unit 91 Since the inside suggestion is executed, it can be specified that the payout rate of the medals is inside when the game is played on the game shop side.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the in-preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion screen in the in-preparation effect so that the main controller 41 has a non-internal game state. It is controlled to a medium or special state, and it is a structure that suggests that the payout rate of medals has not been transferred to the inside, but during the preparation stage, at least the main control unit 41 side pays out medals. The sub-control unit 91 may be configured to display only the preparing screen on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparing effect, as long as it indicates that the ratio has not been changed to the inside.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect when the game state is controlled to the non-internal, while the sub-control unit 91, when the game state is controlled to the internal state, the preparation effect. By not performing the above, it is a configuration that makes an inside suggestion that the game state has transitioned from non-inside to inside, but at least the inside suggests that the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game is played on the game store side, it is only necessary to be able to indicate that the game state has changed from non-inside to inside, and the period during which the main controller 41 controls inside In a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51 or a specific LE
(Production for controlling D to a lighting state, production for outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53, 54, etc.)
On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the specific effect is not performed in the period controlled in the non-internal, or the specific effect is performed in the period controlled in the non-internal, while in the period controlled in the internal. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the specific effect is not performed. Further, in these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the gaming state has transitioned from non-internal to internal in a situation where the game is played at the game store side until the medal payout rate is appropriate inside. is there.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the non-internal display effect that is not performed when the game state is controlled to be inside, every time the game state is controlled to be not inside. Every time the game state changes from non-internal to internal, it is configured to make an internal suggestion indicating that the state has transitioned from non-internal to internal, but the internal suggestion is that at least the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game is played on the game shop side until the inside becomes, it is sufficient to indicate that the game state has changed from non-inside to inside, and the main controller 41 side clears the RAM. After it is specified that the gaming state has not been transferred to the inside, the non-inside being controlled, the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory, etc., the storage means of the sub-control unit 91 (for example, RA
(M, etc.) is started in the initialized state, the main control unit 41 side has not controlled the game state to the inside yet, and the non-inside display effect is displayed in the non-inside being controlled. After performing the transition from the non-inside inside to the inside, the non-inside inside display effect may not be performed even if the state is returned to the inside. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform an unnecessary internal suggestion after the situation where the game is played on the game store side is completed until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate inside.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal control is suggested according to the effect mode controlled by the sub control section 91, but the main control section 41 may be configured to perform the internal control. Main control unit 41
As a configuration for making an internal suggestion, for example, the main control unit 41 includes an LED display that indicates that the main control unit 41 is not in the interior or in the interior, and is turned on when the LED display is not in the interior. On the other hand, while being controlled, it may be configured to suggest that the LED display has been moved to the inside by controlling the LED to be turned off when it is inside. Then, it may be configured to suggest that the internal state has been entered by controlling the light to be turned off when it is not in the internal state. Further, in the configuration in which the main control unit 41 includes an LED display device that indicates that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, the main control unit 41 displays the LED display device that provides a suggestion other than the inside suggestion (for example, game assistance). It may be configured to be used also as the display device 12 or the like) or may be configured to be provided as a dedicated display device that only indicates inside.

[Operation effect 3]
As a conventional slot machine, the advantageous state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state is ended and the advantageous state is changed. There is a configuration in which information related to control of an advantageous state such as the number of remaining games is also initialized.

In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is ended, and information related to the control of the advantageous state such as the number of games remaining in the advantageous state is also generated. Although it will be initialized, the information related to the control of the advantageous state is initialized, which may make the player dissatisfied with the fact that the information is not succeeded to the subsequent game. It can be confusing.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player, and the main control unit 41 will either end condition 1 or end condition 2 in the advantageous section. When one of the conditions is established, the advantageous section can be ended, and when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section data initialization process for initializing the information regarding the advantageous section can be executed. Further, the slot machine 1 includes a sub-control unit 91 capable of performing a post-notification to notify that the information regarding the advantageous period has been initialized, and the sub-control unit 91 ends the game in which the advantageous period ends. It is configured to start the posterior notification and continue the posterior notification for the end even in the games after the game in which the advantageous section ends.
According to this configuration, when one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section and the advantageous section ends and the information about the advantageous section is initialized, the information about the advantageous section is initialized. Since the post-notification to notify the effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused even when the advantageous section ends and information about the advantageous section is not succeeded thereafter. Further, since the end posterior notification is started in the game in which the advantageous period ends and is continuously performed in the games after the advantageous period ends, the player gives the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous period ends. Even if it is overlooked, it is possible to make sure that the information regarding the advantageous section is not succeeded thereafter.

The sub-control unit 91 can perform a post-notification to notify that the information about the advantageous section has been initialized, and a result of notifying a game result in the advantageous section in a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends. It is possible to execute the notification, and it is configured to execute the normal effect after executing the result notification, and the game after the game in which the end posterior notification is started in the game in which the advantageous period ends and the advantageous period ends In addition, in the game in which the result notification is executed and the game in which the normal effect is executed, the end posterior notification is continued.
According to this configuration, the end posterior notification is a game that starts in the game in which the advantageous section ends and is a game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, in which the result notification in the advantageous section is executed, and the normal effect thereafter. Will continue to be performed in the game in which
Even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not succeeded thereafter.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is ended, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section is executed, and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) is the specified number of games (this number). In the embodiment, 1500 games are to be reached, and the end condition 2 is that the net number of medals to be increased in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment).
According to this configuration, the advantageous period ends when the number of games controlled in the advantageous period reaches the prescribed number of games or the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the prescribed number, and the information regarding the advantageous period is also obtained. Since the initialization is performed, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to the control in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can end the advantageous section when either the ending condition 1 or the ending condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. The configuration is such that the advantageous section data initialization process for initializing the information about the advantageous section can be executed, and the AT control number is consumed, and the control state regarding the AT is an advantageous state advantageous for the player. It is possible to control the state, and the information regarding the advantageous section has a configuration including the number of AT games that have been given. By performing the ED-related control 1 and the ED-related control 2, the start condition of the ED control is satisfied. At that time, the number of AT games given becomes the initial value of the ED state (the number of games from the start of the ED control until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied). When either one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, the number of assigned AT games is controlled to be 0 so that the number of assigned AT games does not remain. Although the advantageous section is terminated, the main control unit 41 does not perform the ED-related control 1 and the ED-related control 2, and when either the ending condition 1 or the ending condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. , The assigned AT game number is not controlled to be 0, and when the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, the assigned AT game number is 1 or more. Even when there is such a structure, the advantageous section may be terminated. With such a configuration, even if the advantageous section ends with one or more assigned AT games remaining, and the AT game number is not succeeded as the information regarding the advantageous section, the player is notified by the end posterior notice. It is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused because he / she can recognize the fact.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of consuming the number of AT games provided in the advantageous section and controlling the control state relating to the AT to the AT state which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Yes, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a post-notification to notify that the information about the advantageous section including the number of AT games that has been given has been initialized, and the sub-control unit 91 can give it to the main control unit 41 The number of remaining AT games not consumed and remaining (the number of remaining advantageous section games) is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and the suggested ED effect can be executed. The unit 41 performs the ED-related control 1 and the ED-related control 2 so that when the ED control start condition is satisfied, the number of AT games assigned is the initial value in the ED state (ED control). The number of games from the start of the game until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied), and the number of assigned AT games becomes 0 when either end condition 1 or end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. By sending a command capable of specifying the AT game number to the sub control unit 91, it is suggested that the remaining AT game number that is not consumed by the ED effect is 0. In the game played, the advantageous section is ended, but the main control unit 41 does not perform the ED-related control 1 or the ED-related control 2, and either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is set in the advantageous section. When one of the conditions is satisfied, the number of AT games that have been granted is not controlled to be 0, and when either one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. If number-of-AT-games that are granted remains 1 or more, that is, the number of AT game being provided by ED effect may be configured to terminate the advantageous interval even when it is suggested that the remaining one or more. In such a configuration, until the information about the advantageous section is initialized, that is, the end condition 1 of the advantageous section.
Alternatively, until the end condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of the AT games that are provided and not consumed by the main control unit 41 side by the ED effect. In addition, even if the advantageous section ends even though it is suggested that the number of AT games remains, and even if the right to control to the advantageous state as information regarding the advantageous section is not succeeded thereafter, by the end posterior notification, Since it is possible for the player to recognize this, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is ended, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) is the prescribed number of games (this embodiment). Then, it is a structure that is to reach 1500 games),
The sub-control unit 91, when the advantageous period ending condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous period ends, when the game in which the advantageous period ends is started, that is, when the start switch 7 of the game is operated. In this configuration, it is possible to execute the post-post-notification for notifying that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached the specified number of games.
According to this structure, the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, that is, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment), so that the game concerned. It is possible to recognize that the advantageous section ends in.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is ended, Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section can be executed, and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the prescribed number (
In the present embodiment, the number of cards exceeds 2388, and the sub-control unit 91 ends the game in which the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied and the advantageous section ends. When all the reels in the game are stopped and the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop of the game is finished, it is indicated that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number. This is a configuration capable of executing a post-notification to notify the end.
According to this configuration, it is possible to end the advantageous period in the game when the condition 2 for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, that is, when the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). Can be recognized.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the advantageous period ending condition 1 is a structure that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous period reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment). Number of games immediately before the number of games controlled by the specified number of games reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1499).
It may be a configuration that is established when the game is exceeded. Similarly, the end condition 2 of the advantageous zone is established when the net number of medals added during the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number (2388 in the present embodiment). Specified value (eg 238
9 sheets or more may be used.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is ended, The configuration is such that the advantageous section data initialization process for initializing the information about the advantageous section can be executed, the game value owned by the player can be stored as a credit in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the game is not played. When the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10, the settlement control is performed in which the medals stored in the credit are settled and returned to the player. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a post-post notification to notify that the information regarding the advantageous section has been initialized. In the game in which the advantageous section ends, the sub-control section 91 starts post-post notification to perform settlement control. This is a configuration that terminates the post-notification after the termination of the notification.
According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game, the end posterior notification is ended when the settlement control is performed, so the end posterior notification continues even if the player has changed. It can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can end the advantageous section when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is ended, The sub-control unit 91 has a configuration capable of executing the advantageous section data initialization process for initializing the information about the advantageous section, and the sub control unit 91 can perform a post-notification to notify that the information about the advantageous section has been initialized. Yes, when the end posterior notification is started in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the number of bets for starting the next game is not set after the end of the game and a predetermined period (three minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed. This is a configuration for ending the post-post notification.
According to this configuration, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set after the game ends, and the end posterior notification is ended when a predetermined period of time has passed, so the end is made even though the player has changed. It is possible to prevent the subsequent notification from continuing.

[Effect 4]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a configuration in which the advantageous state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and the advantageous state is ended when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches 1500 which is a limit value.

With the slot machine configured as described above, the advantageous state ends when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value. There may be an advantageous situation between them, and it is not possible to sufficiently prevent an excessive advantage.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 capable of controlling an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player, and the main control unit 41 causes the advantageous section game number and the medal of the advantageous section in the advantageous section. It is possible to update by counting the number of net additions, and end condition 1 which is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section Is the specified number (2,388 in this embodiment)
It is possible to end the advantageous section when either one of the end conditions 2 that is satisfied by exceeding the above is satisfied. Further, in the slot machine 1, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. Previous second predetermined value (2189 sheets in this embodiment)
At any time, the sub-control unit 91 is capable of executing a common advantageous-section end notice for notifying that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are close to each other. In the notice, both the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games as the information regarding the end condition 1 and the remaining number up to the upper limit of the medal net increase number of the advantageous section as the information about the end condition 2 are notified. is there.
According to this configuration, the end condition 1 that is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net additional number of medals updated in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Even when one of the end conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively advantageous due to the control to the advantageous section. In addition, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games, or when the net number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the specified number, it is advantageous Since a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the section is close is executed, the end of the advantageous section can be notified in advance, and the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is notified. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section and the AT state from suddenly ending after the above condition is established. At this time, since the common advantageous zone end notice includes both the information about the end condition 1 and the information about the end condition 2, even if it is the common advantageous period end notice, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is notified. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section and the AT state are ended when the above condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 satisfies the advantageous period ending condition 1 when the number of games controlled in the advantageous period (the number of advantageous period games) reaches the upper limit number of games (first prescribed value). However, the number of advantageous section games is the upper limit number of games.
If it is equal to or more than the first specified value), it may be configured to determine that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied and end the advantageous section. It is also possible to determine that the condition 1 for terminating the advantageous section is satisfied by exceeding the value (first specified value -1) immediately before reaching, and terminate the advantageous section. Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net number of medals added in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (second specified value), and ends the advantageous section. However, the end condition 2 of the advantageous zone is satisfied because the net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the number one more than the specified number (second prescribed value + 1) or becomes one or more more than the specified number. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that this has been done and the advantageous section is ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advantageous interval end notice when the number of advantageous interval games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). It is configured to execute the advantageous section end notice when the number of games becomes equal to or more than the first predetermined value, but is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (1399 games) immediately before reaching the first predetermined value. It may be configured to execute a section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute a notice of the end of the advantageous section when the number of medals to be added to the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that the advantageous zone end notice is executed when the number of sheets becomes equal to or more than the second predetermined value, or the advantageous zone end notice is executed when the net number of sheets of the advantageous period reaches the second predetermined value + 1. ..

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 capable of controlling an advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games and the number of medals netly increased in the advantageous section. Can be updated, and end condition 1 that is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section is the specified number In the embodiment, when any one of the end conditions 2 which is satisfied when the number of sheets exceeds 2388) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended.
According to this configuration, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net number of medals increased during the advantageous section exceeds the specified number and reaches the specified number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it is possible to suppress excessive advantage from being controlled to the advantageous section.

When the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals added in the advantageous section is the specified number. Even when the second predetermined value (2189 sheets in the present embodiment) before reaching the condition is reached, it is possible to execute a common advantageous period end notice for notifying that the condition for ending the advantageous period is close to being satisfied. The advantage section end notice is the difference in the number of advantage section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit value of the advantage section games, and the net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied. Is executed in a manner that the remaining number up to the specified number of medals net increase can be recognized, and the end condition 1 is satisfied each time the number of advantageous zone games and the medals net increase are updated. A configuration in which the difference of medals net increase number of preferably up period number of games of the difference and the termination condition 2 is satisfied is updated.
According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous zone games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining number of medals net increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied are recognized in real time each time the remaining value changes. You can

When the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this example) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section is the specified number. Even when the second predetermined value (2189 sheets in the present embodiment) before reaching the condition is reached, it is possible to execute a common advantageous period end notice for notifying that the condition for ending the advantageous period is close to being satisfied. The advantageous section end notice is the upper limit number of advantageous section games (1500 games in this embodiment) when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied, and the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. By informing that the specified number of medals net increase can be specified, and starts from when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value or when the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. ,advantageous Termination condition is satisfied is near or that establishment of termination condition 2 1 between is configured to notify that close.
According to this configuration, the player is made to recognize the upper limit value of the number of advantageous zone games related to the advantageous condition ending condition 1 and the specified number of medal net increase in the advantageous period related to the advantageous condition ending condition 2. At the same time, the player can be made aware that the end condition 1 is close to being satisfied or that the end condition 2 is close to being satisfied.

In the notice of the end of the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of advantageous section games when the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied and the prescribed number of medals net increase number when the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied are set. Although the notification is made in a identifiable manner, the specified number of advantageous section games when the ending condition 1 is satisfied (the number of games is smaller than the upper limit number of games), and the upper limit of the net number of medals when the ending condition 2 is satisfied. The number of sheets may be specified so that it can be specified. In such a configuration,
It is possible to let the player recognize the prescribed number of games of the advantageous section game related to the end condition 1 of the advantageous section and the upper limit of the medal net increase number of coins of the advantageous section related to the end condition 2 of the advantageous section. The player can be made aware that the end condition 1 is close to being satisfied or the end condition 2 is close to being satisfied.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the number of advantageous section games in the advantageous section is the upper limit number of games (
In the present embodiment, either end condition 1 that is satisfied by reaching 1500 games) or end condition 2 that is satisfied when the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When one of the conditions is established, it is possible to end the advantageous zone,
When the sub-control unit 91 reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games, before the number of medals net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the specified number. When the second predetermined value (2189 sheets in this embodiment) is reached,
It is configured to be able to execute a common advantageous zone end notice that notifies that the end condition of the advantageous zone is close to being satisfied, and the main control unit 41 is satisfied before one end condition and one end condition 2 are satisfied in the advantageous zone. As a possible end condition 3, a predetermined arbitrary condition (in the present embodiment, the game state controlled in the game is non-internal) is satisfied, so that the advantageous section can be ended. It is possible, the first before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games
When the predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) is reached or the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment) before the net number of medals increases exceeds the specified number, the end condition 1 or The end condition 3 is not satisfied until the end condition 2 is satisfied.
According to this configuration, the termination condition 1 is set after the advantage zone end notice is executed because the number of advantageous zone games has reached the first predetermined value or the number of medals net increase exceeds the second predetermined value. Since the advantageous section continues until the condition is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

[Function and effect 5]
As a conventional slot machine, while controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state is ended and the advantageous state is changed. There is a configuration in which information related to control of an advantageous state such as the number of remaining games is also initialized.

In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is ended, and information related to the control of the advantageous state such as the number of games remaining in the advantageous state is also generated. Although it will be initialized, if it is confirmed that the limit value will be reached by adding the remaining number of games in the advantageous state in the middle of the advantageous state, if the added result is notified, Although the advantageous state ends when the limit value is reached, it may be misunderstood that the advantageous state continues.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, and the main control unit 41 can control the game section to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. , An advantageous section game number counter for counting the number of advantageous section games played in the advantageous section and a net number increase counter for counting the net number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section game number counter is the upper limit number of games When the end condition that is satisfied by at least one of the fact that at least one of the following is reached and the net number-of-prints counter exceeds the specified number is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the AT assigned in the advantageous section is ended. Controlling to an AT state that is advantageous to the beneficiary over a period corresponding to the number of games and the number of AT games is given It is configured to be capable of controlling the placed state. Further, the sub-control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 to perform the addition state result notification that notifies the total number of AT games given in the addition state at the end of the addition state.
As a result of the number of AT games being given in the addition state, when the number of advantageous zone games counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the specified number, the addition is finished when the addition state ends. While the state result notification is executed, at least one of the fact that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and the net additional number counter exceeds the specified number as a result of the AT game number being given in the addition state is established. When it is decided, the additional state result notification is not executed.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the addition state, as a result of the fact that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the specified number, the addition is performed. When the state ends, while the addition state result notification for notifying the total number of AT games given in the addition state is executed, while the AT game number is given in the addition state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game. When it is determined that at least one of the fact that the number reaches the number and the net number of copies counter exceeds the specified number is established, the addition state result notification is not executed, so the addition state result notification is executed. After the advantageous section game number counter reaches the maximum number of games and the net increase counter It is possible to prevent the after exceeding the number also would mislead the AT state continues.

In this embodiment, one or more AT games are always provided in the additional state, but in the additional state, the AT game may or may not be provided. In addition, in the addition state, the probability that the AT game is given and the A that is given
It suffices that at least one of the expected values of the number of T games is higher than that when not controlled to the additional state.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the AT state (normal) and the addition state,
It is possible to grant the number of AT games when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least one of the number of advantageous section games reaching the upper limit number of games and the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section exceeding the specified number. When the condition (end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and the AT state is ended, and the number of advantageous section games reaches a first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games. And at least one of the conditions that the net number of medals increased in the advantageous zone exceeds the second predetermined value before exceeding the specified number (starting condition of ED control) is satisfied, the end condition of the advantageous zone is then set. It is possible to start the ED control that keeps the AT state until the condition is established, and as a result of the number of AT games being given, the ED control start condition is set. In some cases, the number of AT games provided is sufficient to satisfy the above condition, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. , A condition in which a sufficient number of AT games are provided so that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied even if ED control is not performed. Although there is also a configuration, the main control unit 41,
Only when the configuration in which ED control is not performed, that is, the number of AT games is given, and the sufficient number of AT games are given so that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, The configuration may be such that the termination condition is established.

Even if the main control unit 41 does not perform the ED control as described above, the sub control unit 91 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied as a result of the number of AT games being given in the addition state. If the addition state result notification is executed without the addition state, the addition state result notification is executed when the number of AT games is given in the addition state and it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In the configuration in which the AT state is not executed, the addition state result notification is executed to maintain the AT state even after the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, that is, the configuration in which the main control unit 41 performs the ED control. It is possible to prevent giving a misunderstanding.

As a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines that at least one of the advantage zone game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number When it is determined that the AT condition is established, the AT state is continued until at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number is established. After performing the ED transition confirmation suggesting effect that suggests that the ED transition confirming suggestion is performed, either the advantageous zone game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. Using the background image peculiar to the period, A
This is a configuration for performing T-state effect (ED confirmation) and ED effect.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, at least one of the advantage zone game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the prescribed number is established. When it is decided, the AT state is kept until at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net additional number counter exceeding the prescribed number by the ED transition confirmation suggesting effect. It is suggested that it will be continued, and thereafter, it is peculiar to the period until the advantageous period game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, whichever is the case. Since the AT state effect (ED confirmation) and the ED effect are executed using the background image of Due to the transition confirmation suggestion production and the subsequent AT state production (ED confirmation) and ED production, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the prescribed number is established. It is possible to clearly recognize that the AT state continues until and that the AT state ends at that point.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the additional state, and the additional state includes a plurality of additional states A to C having different expected values of the number of AT games to be added, and the sub control. No matter what kind of additional state is controlled by the main control unit 41 side, the section 91 is provided with the AT game number in the additional state, and as a result, the advantageous section game number counter has the upper limit game number. When it is decided that at least one of the following is reached and the net number-of-payments counter exceeds the prescribed number, it is decided that the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, and any kind of addition state is controlled. Even if it is, after the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games, and the net increase number counter is the specified number. It is a period over configured to execute AT state directing (ED confirmed) until either one is satisfied that exceed.
According to this configuration, regardless of which type of addition is controlled, at least one of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number in a common flow It can be recognized that the AT state ends when one of the conditions is established.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the additional state, and the additional state includes a plurality of additional states A to C having different expected values of the number of AT games to be added, and the sub control. When the main control unit 41 side controls the part 91 to be in the add-on state, the part 91 can perform effects in different effect modes according to the controlled add-on conditions A to C. Regardless of which type of additional state is controlled by the side, the number of advantageous zone game counters reaches the upper limit number of games as a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, and the net additional number counter. When it is decided that at least one of the fact that the number exceeds the specified number is established, an ED transition confirmation suggestive effect is performed, and any type of addition is controlled. Even if it is, until the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net additional number counter exceeds the specified number This is a configuration for executing the AT state effect (ED confirmation) over a period.
According to this configuration, regardless of which type of addition is controlled, at least one of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number in a common flow It can be recognized that the AT state ends when one of the conditions is established.

Note that the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to the added-on state, and in the added-on state, the effect mode of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 is different, and the added state is given by the main control unit 41. In this configuration, a plurality of types of additional states A to C having different expected values of the AT game number are included. In the additional state, at least one of the performance mode and the expected value of the number of AT games to be provided is different. A configuration including an additional state may be used.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the main control unit 41 to be in the additional state, and in the additional state, a plurality of additions having different effect modes and expected values of the number of AT games to be added are added. Including the states A to C, the sub control unit 91 has a configuration capable of executing the AT state effect in the AT state, and when the sub control unit 91 is controlled by the main control unit 41 to be in the addition state. As a result of the number of AT games being added to, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games, and the net increase number counter exceeds the stipulated number. After the addition state result notification is executed when is completed, the AT state effect (normal) is executed using the common normal background regardless of the type of the added state that has been completed. It is a configuration that.
According to this configuration, the common AT state effect (normal) is executed after the end regardless of which type of addition state is controlled. It can be easily recognized.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of displaying an AT game number display that indicates the remaining number of AT games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and performs an ED transition confirmation suggestion effect. When it is, the AT game number display is not displayed, but the AT game number display is displayed at the timing of starting the AT state effect (ED confirmation).
According to this configuration, the AT game number display is not displayed and the remaining AT game number is not displayed when the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, so that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and the net increase It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the AT state effect (ED confirmation) that suggests that the AT state continues until at least one of the number of sheets exceeding the specified number is satisfied.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state relating to the AT to the AT state and the addition state, and the number of AT games can be achieved by satisfying a predetermined grant condition in both the AT state and the addition state. The sub-control unit 91 determines that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number as a result of the AT game number being added in the addition state, and the net increase counter indicates the specified number. Even when it is decided that at least one of the exceeding is established, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the AT state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net additional number. Even when it is decided that at least one of the number of counters exceeding the specified number is established, the ED shift is made. To control so as to perform the constant suggestion director. In addition, the sub control unit 9
In the case of 1, it is determined that, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, at least one of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net additional number counter exceeding the specified number is established. Even in such a case, as a result of the AT game number being given in the AT state, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net number-of-increasing counter exceeding the specified number is established. Even when it is decided to do, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net additional number counter exceeding the specified number after performing the ED transition confirmation suggestive effect. The AT state effect (ED confirmation) is executed for a period until one of the conditions is established.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being added in the additional state, at least one of the advantage section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number is established. When the number of AT games is given in the AT state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and / or the net increase counter exceeds the specified number. Even when it is decided that one of them is established, the AT is achieved by at least one of the fact that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. It is possible to recognize in a common flow that the state ends.

In the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment suggests the remaining number of AT games A
By displaying the T game number display on the liquid crystal display 51, the remaining number of AT games is displayed. On the other hand, when the AT game number display is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the added state, the AT game number It is a configuration in which the remaining number is not displayed.
According to this configuration, the AT game number display is not displayed and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed in the addition state in which the AT game number may be given. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of displaying an AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous section game number counter is the upper limit game. If it is not determined that at least one of reaching the number and / or exceeding the specified number by the net number-of-sheets counter is established, an end suggestion notification indicating the end of the AT state is completed before the end of the AT state. Then, the display of the remaining number of AT games by the AT game number display is used to indicate the end of the AT state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games, and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. When it is determined that at least one of the above conditions is established, the end of the advantageous section and the AT state is indicated before the end of the advantageous section and the AT state. By performing the end prior notification, the display of the remaining number of AT games by the AT game number display is not used, but the end prior notification image of the end prior notification is used as another display to indicate the end of the AT state. is there.
According to this configuration, when the AT state ends due to at least one of the fact that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is If at least one of the number of games counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net number-of-games counter exceeding the specified number is not satisfied, A
Rather than using the display of the remaining number of AT games by the AT game number display as in the case of ending the T state, other displays are used to indicate the end of the AT state, so that the player is carelessly agitated. Can indicate the end of the AT state without.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines that at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number in the AT state is established, A configuration in which an AT state effect (ED confirmation) peculiar to the period is executed for a period until either one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net number-of-increments counter exceeds the specified number are satisfied. In the AT state effect (ED confirmation), it is confirmed that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, whichever is established.
The configuration is such that the number of remaining games until the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the upper limit number of games and the number of remaining games until the net additional number counter value exceeds the specified number.
According to this configuration, when it is determined that either one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established, that fact and the advantageous section game number are determined. It is possible to let the player recognize the number of remaining games until the counter value reaches the upper limit number of games and the number of remaining games until the net additional number counter value exceeds the specified number.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the AT state result notification for notifying the result in the AT state (in the present embodiment, the total payout number of medals in the AT state, the number of games in the AT state) at the end of the AT state. When the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the first predetermined number before reaching the upper limit game number, and when the net additional number counter value exceeds the specified number
When the predetermined value is exceeded, the fact that the conditions for ending the advantageous section and the AT state are close to each other is notified, and A
In the game in which the advantageous section game number counter value has reached the upper limit number of games and the game in which the net increase number counter value exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section game number counter value It is possible to make a post-notification to notify that the maximum number of games has been reached and that the net increase counter value has exceeded the specified number, and the post-post notification will be continued even while the AT status result notification is being executed. It is a configuration that allows it.
According to this configuration, the advantageous section is ended and the AT is ended when at least one of the advantageous section game number counter value reaching the upper limit game number and the net additional number counter value exceeding the specified number is satisfied. It is possible to make the player effectively recognize the end of the state by the end pre-notification and the end post-notification.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 issues an end posterior notification for notifying that the advantageous zone game number counter value has reached the upper limit game number and that the net additional number counter value has exceeded the specified number.
Even after the T-state result notification is completed, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to continue for a period until the predetermined number of games elapses. It may be configured, for example, when ending the AT state result notification,
Even with the configuration in which the end post notification is also ended, the player can be effectively recognized by the end advance notification and the end post notification.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the AT state result notification for notifying the result in the AT state at the end of the AT state (in this embodiment, the total payout number of medals in the AT state, the number of games in the AT state). It is possible to perform, while performing the AT state result notification, to perform the indentation prevention notification for urging the intrusion prevention, and after that, when the predetermined time elapses, the intrusion prevention notification is ended, while the predetermined time elapses. Even after that, the configuration is such that control is performed such that the post-notification of termination is continued.
According to this configuration, the slip-in prevention notification is terminated after a predetermined time has passed,
Since the end posterior notification continues even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the advantageous section is ended when the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the upper limit game number or the net additional number counter value exceeds the specified number. It is possible to make the player effectively recognize that the AT state has ended.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has stop switches 8L, 8 which are advantageous for the player.
It is possible to perform navigation notification that notifies the operation mode of C and 8R, and the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration that can perform navigation effect that suggests the operation mode notified by the navigation notification. Includes the first mode and the second mode, and the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number in the AT state or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. If it is not decided to do so, the navigation effect may be performed in the first mode or the navigation effect in the second mode, while the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number, and When it is determined that either one of the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the specified number is established, the navigation effect may be performed in the first mode, but the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode. It is a configuration.
According to this configuration, the navigation effect is set to the first mode before it is determined that one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. It is possible to suggest the possibility of transitioning to the additional state, etc., by properly selecting whether to perform in the second mode.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has stop switches 8L, 8 which are advantageous for the player.
It is possible to perform the navigation notification that notifies the operation modes of C and 8R, and the sub control unit 91 can perform the navigation effect that suggests the operation mode notified by the navigation notification. By performing the operation in the two modes, the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration that suggests that it is more likely that the transition to the additional state has been decided than when performing in the first mode. If it is not determined that either the number of games counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net number-of-games counter exceeds the specified number, it is possible to perform the navigation effect in the first mode. While the navigation effect may be performed in two modes, it is ensured that either the advantageous zone game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, whichever is established. If you are, it is possible to perform navigation effect in the first embodiment, a configuration that does not perform the navigation effect in the second embodiment.
According to this configuration, before it is determined that one of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established, that is, the AT game number is added. When the AT state is extended by being hit, the navigation effect is performed in the second mode, so that it can be expected that an additional ride will be performed, while the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games. After it is determined that either one of the above-mentioned fact and the fact that the net increase counter exceeds the specified number is established, that is, when the AT state is not extended, the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode. Thus, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that there is a possibility that the addition will be performed.

As a result of the AT game number being given in the addition state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment,
When it is determined that either one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established, the ending condition of the additional state (in the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is set). Even if the number of games to be played is not established, the additional state is terminated.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, it is possible that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase counter exceeds the specified number. Despite the confirmation, the additional state will not continue unnecessarily.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine in which the bet number is set by using the medal and the credit as the game value is explained, but the slot in which the bet number is set by using the game ball as the game value. It may be applied to a machine or a full credit type slot machine in which a bet amount is set by using only credit as a gaming value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the above-described embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the bet number using.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and for example, a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls can be used together. May be That is, it is possible to set the bet number and play the game using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and to generate a plurality of types of games such as medals and gaming balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out any of the utility values.

Further, in the embodiment and the modification, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball is shot in a game area. It is also applicable to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by doing.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 12 game auxiliary indicator 12a section display LED
41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display section that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling the advantageous section,
Numerical value updating means for updating a specific numerical value in the advantageous section,
Advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when the ending condition that is satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number is satisfied,
Advantageous state control means for controlling in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to an advantageous amount in the advantageous zone,
A specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state to increase the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
Specific result notification means capable of executing a specific result notification for notifying the advantageous amount increased in the specific state when the specific state ends,
Derivation operation means that the player operates to derive the display result,
An operation mode notification unit capable of performing an operation mode notification for notifying an operation mode of the derivation operation unit;
Equipped with
The specific result notification means,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific result notification is executed when the specific state ends without confirming that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number,
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number, the specific result notification is not executed,
The operation mode notification includes a first notification mode and a second notification mode,
The operation mode notification means may perform the operation mode notification in the first notification mode or the second notification when it is not determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in the advantageous state. While the operation mode notification may be performed according to the mode, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in the advantageous state, the operation mode notification is performed in the first notification mode. A slot machine that may be performed but does not perform the operation mode notification in the second notification mode.

Images